Home

English

1. Cr Pr Cb Pb AUDIO OUT REMOTE CONTROL NOTE Before connecting the projector to a computer consult the computer s manual and check the compatibility of the signal level the synchronization methods and the display resolution output to the projector Some signal may need an adapter to input this projector Some computers have multiple screen display modes that may include some signals which are not supported by this projector Although the projector can display signals with a resolution up to UXGA 1600x1200 or up to W UXGA 1920x1200 for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 the signal will be converted to the projector s panel resolution before being displayed The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and the projector panel are identical e If you connect this projector and a notebook computer you need output the display to an external monitor or output simultaneously to the internal display and an external monitor Consult the computer s manual for the setting e Depending on the input signal the automatic adjustment function of this projector may take some time and not function correctly Note that a composite sync signal or sync on green signal may confuse the automatic adjustment function of this projector 452 If the automatic adjustment function does not work correctly you may not see the dialog to set the
2. ja gt T i T AUDIO OUT REMOTE CONTROL _ WLAN RJ 45 jack About the details of network communication please refer to the Network Guide Pin Signal Pin Signal USB TYPE A USB A type jack x2 USB TYPE B USB B type jack Data REMOTE CONTROL IN OUT 3 5 stereo mini jack To input SCART RGB signal ex 7 SCART cable l RCA plugs plug Audio L ee sm SCART MONITOR OUT connector jack To input SCART RGB signal to the projector use a SCART to RCA cable Connect the plugs refer to above ex For more reference please consult your dealer IDSeYeYAO gt COMMUNICatiON When the projector connects to the computer by RS 232C communication the projector can be controlled with RS 232C commands from the computer For details of RS 232C commands refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table L19 Connection 1 Turn off the projector and the computer 2 Connect the projector s CONTROL port and the computer s RS 232C port with a RS 232C cable cross Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure 3 Turn the computer on and after the computer has started up turn the projector on A Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to OFF in the COMMUNICATION menu of the OPTION SERVICE menu RS 232C cable cross RS 232C port CONTROL port of the computer of the pr
3. FUNCTION ke button LENS MEMORY LENS MEMORY J button To clear the adjustment stored in a lens memory select CLEAR LENS MEMORY and press the or ENTER button The CLEAR LENS MEMORY dialog will be displayed Select the number of the lens memory to be cleared using the A V buttons and press the button A message dialog is displayed for confirmation Press the button again to clear the lens memory 30 Using the automatic adjustment feature Press AUTO button on the remote control Pressing this button performs the following O For a computer signal The vertical position the horizontal position and the horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted Use a bright picture when adjusting O For a video signal and s video signal The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected automatically This function is available only when the AUTO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu 151 The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default O Fora component video signal The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted 8 8 fo VY e 0 8 fpo AUTO
4. 109 SONIY TOFT ee Starting USB Display Right Click menu CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 gt Floating menu Options naan Displaying the condition of the projector 20 Maint 113 Displaying the log ee eee ee Replacing the lamp 113 p g p Power on off sssssssssnns 24 Cleaning and replacing the air filter 115 Turning on the power 24 Other care 417 Turning off the power 24 ae Operating 00080 nena 25 Troubleshooting te a aia 118 Adiueana th 25 Warnings displayed on the Status Monitor 118 justing the volume ae lt Only for CP X8160 Temporarily turning off the screen and audio 25 CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 gt Selecting an input signal 26 Related messages 118 Selecting an aspect ratio 27 Regarding the indicator lamps 120 Adjusting the projector s elevator 28 Resetting all settings 122 Adjusting the lens 29 Phenomena that may be easy to Adjusting the zoom and focus be mistaken for machine defects 123 Adjusting the lens position Lens memory on Using the automatic adjustment feature 31 Specifications 128 Adjusting the position 31 Correcting the distortion 32 Using the magnify feature 35 Temporarily freezing the screen 36 Temporarily shading the screen 36 PbyP 0 eee e eee eee ee 3 lt Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 gt Using the menu
5. cccceceeceeeees 3 2 Installation cccceseeeeeeees 5 2 1 Preparing for Intellectual Stack 5 2 2 Installing the first projector Set A 6 Deciding installation position 6 Setting up Set Aiscssccatcccseacnecsensecanenecsees 6 2 3 Installing the second projector Set B 8 Deciding installation position 8 Connecting projectors c0ccceceeees 8 Setting up Set DB issesccescdecnestennancteacornvsencs 8 2 4 Confirming Main and Sub settingS ccsccceee 10 2 5 Fine adjusting IMAGE position cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 For Intellectual Stack users 11 For Simple Stack USEIS c 0088 12 ae 3 STACK menu settings 13 3 1 Displaying STACK menu 13 3 2 Selecting Main Sub or off 14 3 3 Selecting lamp operation mode 15 3 4 Selecting lamp switching mode 17 3 5 Selecting input source for Sub 18 3 6 Exiting Intellectual Stack MENU cccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeees 19 STACK Menu aise sesh nersteoadaxteMlesctensedes 19 Dialog from STACK menu 5 19 3 7 Important information for Intellectual Stack 08 20 4 Connecting cables 23 4 1 Connecting an RS 232C cable 23 4 2 Connecting signal cables 24 Inputting image from Main to Sub 24 Inputting image to Sub and Main individually 24 5 Setting input por
6. 38 3 1 Projector Web Control continued 3 1 11 Remote Control The functions on the bundled remote control are assigned to the Web Remote Control screen Do not attempt to control the projector with the projector s remote control and via Web Remote Control at the same time It may cause some operational errors in the projector Item Description STANDBY Assigned the same operation as STANDBY button ON Assigned the same operation as ON button COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 Assigned the same operation as COMPUTER IN1 button Assigned the same operation as COMPUTER IN2 button LAN Assigned the same operation as LAN button USB TYPEA USB TYPE B Assigned the same operation as USB TYPE A button Assigned the same operation as USB TYPE B button COMPONENT Assigned the same operation as COMPONENT button S VIDEO Assigned the same operation as S VIDEO button Assigned the same operation as VIDEO button Assigned the same operation as HDMI 1 button Assigned the same operation as HDMI 2 button Assigned the same operation as FREEZE button Assigned the same operation as AV MUTE button Assigned the same operation as A button Assigned the same operation as Y button Assigned the same operation as lt button Assigned the same operation as button Assigned the same operation as ENTER button RESET Assigned the same operation as MENU buiton Ass
7. continued on next page 97 PC LESS Presentation continued NOTE These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed e The Thumbnail mode is able to display up to 20 files in one page e It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen Slideshow or Full Screen image is displayed e The image quality may deteriorate when playing back audio data included in a movie If you want to give priority to the image quality turn off the sound by setting J to off e If one of the AUDIO IN ports is selected or x is selected for USB TYPE Ain AUDIO SOURCE of the AUDIO menu 457 3 cannot be operated e Some error icons will be displayed on the Thumbnail screen This file seems to be broken or not supported format A file that cannot be displayed on the m ql Thumbnail screen is indicated by a file AUDIO format icon 98 PC LESS Presentation continued Full Screen Mode The Full Screen mode shows a full display image To display in Full Screen mode select an image in the Thumbnail screen Then press the ENTER button on the remote control the INPUT button on the control panel or click ENTER on the Web Remote Control Full screen display Operations for still images The following operations are enabled in the Full Screen mode while a still image is displayed Button operation Remote Web Remote Functions control Control Y Vv
8. Screen height Projectar bacon O CP SX8350 with SL 702 1400 x 1050 10 4 3 Ooo o 7 Projection Screen height Screen Projection Screen height distance size distance Pat 48 1 5 1 8 wr rs eoar orfa osl ala 1 2 48 EEDI 11 42 16 8 3i 1 1 06 20 min a max E a max inch m inch cm Sr cm amje inch m inch cm ao cm am JEE 79 64 25 87 82 32 941 1 3 0 7 16 63 24 101 96 38 1 4 4 5 09 19 73 28 115 noj 43 12 5 1810 21 84 32 86 3 3 130 123 49 14 5 20 1 1 24 94 96 3 7 144 137 54 15 6 2 2 1 2 2 6 104 6j 143 5 5 216 206 81 23 9 33 1 9 40 156 EOE 20 274 108t_ sol 2 2 5 5 3 207 238 9 1 359 343 135 38 15 285 10 9 430 411 162 46 18 475 18 2 717 686 270 76 30 11 1 o 77 30 110 90 35 126 103 41 IKOE 157 8 391 EEE 469 781 Screen height Broec ioh Screen Projection Screen height l distance size distance ch cm inch cm 86 51 20 114 68 27 143 85 33 171 102 40 1 200 119 47 8 228 135 53 aca cm inch cm i ro 45 18 EE 2 2 101 60 24 6 2 08 os 15 58 29 OEE 7 3 10 08 18 72 36 151 90 35 9 4f 12 o9 22 86 4 3 176 105 44 10 4l 4 4 11 2 6 100 202 120 47 12 5 16 1 2 29 115 5 8 227 135 53 13 _ 5 1 8 14l 3 3 129 65 256 152 60 6 4 252 150 59 15 6
9. IMEI SA SOAS The following signals are used for the initial settings The signal timing of some computer models may be different In such case adjust the items V POSITION and H POSITION in the IMAGE menu Back porch B Front porch D Back porch b Front porch d Tctive video C 3 Active video c i Data Data H smn MNL V snc MN Sync A Sync a Resolution H x V B C D a b Signal mode 720 x 400 2 0 3 0 1 0 3 42 TEXT 640x480 3 8 19 254 0 6 2 33 480 10 VGA 60Hz _ 640x480 1 3 4 1 203 08 3 28 480 9 VGA 72Hz VGA 75Hz 800x600 2 0 3 6 22 2 07 2 22 600 1 SVGA 56Hz _ 800x600 3 2 2 2 20 0 1 0 4 23 600 1 SVGA 60Hz _ 800x600 24 13 16 0 1 1 6 23 600 37 SVGA 72Hz 800x600 16 3 2 16 2 0 3 3 21 600 1 SVGA 75Hz 800x600 1 1 27 142 06 3 27 600 1 SVGA 85Hz _ 832x624 11 39 145 06 3 39 624 1 Mac 16 mode 1024x768 2 1 25 15 8 04 6 29 768 3 XGA 6OHz 1024x768 18 19 137 03 6 29 768 3 XGA 7OHz XGA 85Hz 1152 x 864 manaa 12 24 fror os 9 32 ww 1 a 1280x768 1 7 2 5 16 0 08 3 23 768 1 W XGA 60Hz 1280 x 800 move te 2 fisa oe gt a om as 1280 x 960 amsn vo es no oe gt om ane 1440x900 14 22 135 08 6 25 900 3 WXGA 60Hz 1680x1050 1 2 1 9 11 5 07 6 30 1050 3 WSXGA 6
10. continued on next page 80 ltem scription Selecting this item displays the WIRED WIRED SETUP SETUP menu for the wired LAN A _ Use the A V buttons to select an item SUBNET MASK a DEFAULT GATEWAY and the gt or ENTER button on the remote DNS SERVER gt TIME DIFFERENCE control to perform the item T RETURN Use the A V buttons to turn DHCP on off ON OFF Select OFF when the network does not have DHCP DHCP enabled To save the setting press the gt Dynamic Host Dutton Configuration When the DHCP setting changes to ON it Protocol takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP server e Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if the projector could not obtain an IP address from server even if DHCP is ON Use the A W lt b buttons to enter the IP ADDRESS This function can only be used when DHCP is set WIRED SETUP to OFF IP ADDRESS The IP ADDRESS is the number that identifies this projector on the network You cannot have two devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same network e The IP ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 is prohibited Use the A W lt P buttons to enter the same SUBNET MASK used by your computer SUBNET This function can only be used when DHCP is set MASK to OFF e The SUBNET MASK 0 0 0 0 is prohibited Use the A W lt P gt buttons to enter the DEFAULT GATEWAY a node on a computer network that DEFAULT serves as an acces
11. About disposal of a lamp This product contains a mercury lamp do not put in trash Dispose of in accord with environmental laws For lamp recycling go to www lamprecycle org in USA For product disposal contact your local government agency or www eiae org in the US or www epsc ca in Canada For more information call your dealer e If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does unplug the power cord from the outlet and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer Note that shards of glass could damage the projector s internals or cause injury during handling so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself e If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does ventilate Disconnect the room well and make sure not to breathe the gas that comes out of the Ee i projector vents or get it in your eyes or mouth outlet e Before replacing the lamp make sure the power switch is off and the power cable is not plugged in then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns as well as damaging the lamp e Do not open the lamp cover while the projector is suspended from above This is dangerous since if the lamp s bulb has broken the shards will fall out when the cover is opened In addition working in high places is S dangerous so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even
12. The test patterns for CUSTOM of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP are not displayed It takes slightly longer time to turn on the projectors This is not a oi Er MANUAL malfunction Menuto selet gt e There are cases in which the screen MAIN or SUB Menu on Main projector will be darker when any of the OSDs are displayed if DUAL is selected EXECUTE 2h Menu to select gt FILTER TIME MAIN or SUB En AGE T ENGLISH continued on next page STACK menu settings 3 3 Selecting lamp operation mode continued NOTE When DUAL is selected for LAMP MODE the images projected from the Main and Sub projectors may be different It is recommended to set the projectors as follows Set the same image for TEMPLATE and START UP on the Main and Sub projectors Capture the same image for MyScreen on the Main and Sub projectors Save the same image on MY IMAGE on the Main and Sub projectors Set the same message content for the Messenger function MNetwork Guide Messenger Function on the Main and Sub projectors e When DUAL is selected for LAMP MODE image shift can result in image quality degradation on the screen Perform the INSTALLATION setting before adjusting the image position as the image position will change when the INSTALLATION setting is changed EQOperating Guide SETUP menu e When ALTERNATE is selected and an error occur on the projector in operation causing the lamp to turn off the other projector will au
13. button iol guea NOA omoose oO oo 8 oe p NOTE The automatic adjustment operation requires approx 10 seconds Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input e When this function is performed for a video signal a certain extra such as a line may appear outside a picture e When this function is performed for a computer signal a black frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen depending on the computer model e The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu E169 Adjusting the position 4 Press POSITION button on the remote control when no menu is indicated The POSITION indication will appear on the screen 2 l Use the A Y 4 gt cursor buttons to adjust the picture ma POSITION position C satan PEER When you want to reset the operation press RESET button on the remote control during the operation To complete this operation press POSITION button again Even if you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds ol o aay ADS EDOOOOTE Ol hI O cx gt gona 248 O Go o0 HA NOTE When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video signal some image such as an extra line may appear at outside of the picture e When this function is performed on a video signal or s video
14. GN D REMOTE CONTROL 24 VCR DVD Blu ray Disc player COMPONENT S VIDEO VIDEO T Cr Pr Cb Pb AUDIO OUT R E Co AUDIO OUT T REMOTE CONTROL Speakers Monitor with an amplifier RGB IN L R Another rojector proj GD USBTYPEA oo I SOJ m Wired pere A ai E Ke VIDE Mee control LAN m CONTRG D Pb Y COMPONENT a C O O a AUDIO OUT REMOTE CONTROL 25 135mm 26 NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual The reproduction transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent REMARQUE Les informations contenues dans ce manuel peuvent faire l objet dechangements sans avertissement pr alable Le fabricant ne prend aucune responsabilit pour les erreurs qui pourraient se trouver dans ce manuel La reproduction la transmission ou l utilisation de ce document ou de son contenu est interdite sauf autorisation sp ciale crite HINWEIS Die Informationen in diesem Handbuch k nnen ohne vorherige Ank ndigung g
15. If you control one projector with the remote control during installation it is recommended to operate the other with the control panel or a wired remote control In this case disable the remote control receiving on the other projector with the KEY LOCK feature MoOperating Guide OPTION menu e Images from Set A and Set B may superimpose well but the image positions can shift over time Readjust to superimpose the images 2 1 Preparing for Intellectual Stack When using Intellectual Stack via RS 232C connection ensure the following set tings are set on the two projectors Otherwise the Intellectual Stack menu cannot be operated e STANDBY MODE in SETUP menu NORMAL CQOperating Guide SETUP menu e COMMUNICATION TYPE under COMMUNICATION in SERVICE menu OFF EQOperating Guide OPTION menu e STACK LOCK in SECURITY menu OFF When STACK LOCK is set to on menus related to Instant Stack cannot be operated It is therefore necessary to set it to off during installation and menu setting 1 Use the A W lt P gt buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt SECURITY gt STACK LOCK STACK LOCK dialog will appear on screen MoOperating Guide SECURITY menu ee Cea 2 Use the A V buttons to highlight OFF and press the gt button to complete the setting Installation 2 2 Installing the first projector Set A Deciding installation position Decide the position of Set A and its projection angle MUser s M
16. MONITOR OUT S VIDEO Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the S VIDEO input port is selected MONITOR OUT VIDEO Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the VIDEO input port is selected MONITOR OUT STANDBY continued on next page Assigns the MONITOR OUT in the standby mode 35 3 1 Projector Web Control Projector Control continued ltem Description O AUDIO VOLUME Adjusts the volume setting SPEAKER Turns the built in speaker on off AUDIO SOURCE l l COMPUTER IN1 Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN1 input port AUDIO SOURCE l COMPUTER IN2 Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE COMPUTER IN2 input port AUDIO SOURCE LAN Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE LAN input port AUTIO SOURCE USB assigns the AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE A input port AUTIO SOURCE USB Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE USB TYPE B input port enh SOURCE Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE HDMI 1 input port AUDIO SOURCE HDMI 2 AUDIO SOURCE COMPONENT AUDIO SOURCE S VIDEO AUDIO SOURCE VIDEO AUDIO SOURCE AUDIO OUT STANDBY HDMI AUDIO HDMI 1 HDMI AUDIO HDMI 2 SCREEN LANGUAGE Selects the language for the OSD MENU POSITION V Adjusts the vertical Menu position MENU POSITION H Adjusts the horizontal Menu position BLANK Selects the BLANK screen START UP Selects the start up screen mode MESSAGE Turns the message function on off TEMPLATE C C DISPLAY C C MODE Se
17. MOVAS If an abnormal operation should occur stop using the projector immediately Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector the following checks and measures are recommended before requesting repair If this does not resolve the problem please contact your dealer or service company They will tell you what warranty condition is applied Warnings displayed on the Status Monitor lt Only for CP X8160 CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 gt If an error occurs a warning will be displayed on the Status Monitor 421 Resolve the errors referring to the table of the sections Related messages and Regarding the indicator lamps when the warning is displayed Related messages When some message appears check and cope with it according to the following table Although these messages will be automatically disappeared around several minutes it will be reappeared every time the power is turned on There is no input signal COMPUTER IN 1 NO INPUT IS DETECTED Please confirm the signal input connection and the status of the signal source The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B 67 Select the USB DISPLAY for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu In this case you cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function Otherwise select other port for picture input Projector is waiting for an image file Check the hardware connection settings on the project
18. continued on next page Resolution H x V H frequency KHz V frequency Hz Rating Signal mode 4 1280 x 1024 91 1 85 0 VESA SXGA 85Hz 2 1400x1050 65 2 60 0 VESA SXGA 60Hz 3 1680x1050 65 3 60 0 VESA _ WSXGA 60Hz 1 1600x1200 75 0 600 VESA UXGA 60Hz W UXGA 60Hz 1 Supported except for HDMI input 2 Only for CP X8150 CP X8160 and CP SX8350 3 Only for CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 4 Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 but except for HDMI input NOTE Be sure to check jack type signal level timing and resolution before connecting this projector to a computer e Some computers may have multiple display screen modes Use of some of these modes will not be possible with this projector e Depending on the input signal full size display may not be possible in some cases Refer to the number of display pixels above e Although the projector can display signals with a resolution up to UXGA 1600x1200 or up to W UXGA 1920x1200 for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 the signal will be converted to the projector s panel resolution before being displayed The best display performance will be achieved if the resolutions of the input signal and projector panel are identical e Automatic adjustment may not function correctly with some input signals e The image may not be displayed correctly when the input sync signal is a composite sync or a sync on G
19. e The address allows not only IP address but also domain Trap address name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters Download MIB file Downloads a MIB file from the projector Network Bridge Port Configures the Bridge port number Input the port number Except for 41794 9715 9716 9719 9720 5900 5500 4352 between 1024 and 65535 can be set up It is set to 9717 as the default setting Port number Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection from Network Restart on the main menu 41 23 3 1 Projector Web Control continued Displays and configures e mail addressing settings pos ese Item Description Click the Enable check box to use the e mail function Send Mail Configure the conditions for sending e mail under the Alert Settings Configures the address of the mail server in IP format e The address allows not only IP address but also domain SMTP Server Address name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters Configures the sender e mail address Sender E mail address The length of
20. gt gt or or Control panel Shows the next file PAGE DOWN PAGE DOWN A A lt lt or or PAGE UP PAGE UP ENTER INPUT ENTER Displays Thumbnail Shows the previous file 99 PC LESS Presentation continued Operations for movie A remote control icon and a progress bar are displayed when one of the cursor buttons ENTER button or INPUT button on the remote control control panel or Web Remote Control is pressed or clicked while a movie is playing in the Full Screen mode The following operations are enabled while the remote control icon and progress bar are displayed Button operation Web Remote Functions Control Remote Control panel control Play Pause toggle gt FF Fast forward lt REW Fast rewind ENTER ENTER Stop Displays Thumbnail PAGE DOWN PAGE DOWN Shows the next file PAGE UP PAGE UP Shows the previous file NOTE These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed e It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen Slideshow or Full Screen image is displayed 100 PC LESS Presentation continued Slideshow Mode The Slideshow mode displays images in full screen and switches the images at intervals set in INTERVAL on the Thumbnail menu 2197 You can start this function from the Slideshow menu To display the Slideshow menu
21. 2 3 4 buttons L68 33 LENS SHIFT button 0129 34 LENS MEMORY button 130 35 FOCUS buttons 129 36 ZOOM buttons 4129 37 Battery cover 417 38 Wired remote control port 414 38 Back of the remote control 1 STANDBY button 224 1 2 2 ON button 24 3 goma 3 ID 1 2 3 4 buttons 217 4 4 COMPUTER 1 button 26 7 es 5 COMPUTER 2 button L426 8 6 COMPUTER 3 button 10 12 7 LAN button 2126 al 15 8 USB TYPE A button 226 Te 9 USB TYPE B button 426 16 10 COMPONENT button 126 26 11 S VIDEO button 26 17 Deas 12 VIDEO button 126 18 13 HDMI 1 button 26 S 78 14 HDMI 2 button 226 27 19 1 15 DIGITAL button 20 TE NE a 16 PAGE UP PAGE DOWN buttons 919 96 32 j ro HET 17 F5 button 418 19 30 SOR 18 ENTER button 0219 22 39 31 4 E 19 RESET button 139 20 ESC button 219 39 21 A V lt cursor buttons a 22 MENU button 139 34 36 NOTE Any button marked with is not supported on this projector 1119 e Any button marked with is available only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 e Each time you press any button except ID buttons the ID button of current selected ID number will light 117 SCN Uo Install the projector according
22. 2 NAK reply 15h When the projector cannot understand the received command the projector returns the error code In such a case check the sending code and send the same command again 3 Error reply 1Ch 0000h When the projector cannot execute the received command for any reasons the projector returns the error code In such a case check the sending code and the setting status of the projector 4 Data reply 1Dh xxxxh When the projector receives the GET command correctly the projector returns the responce code and 2 bytes of data NOTE For connecting the projector to your devices please read the manual for each devices and connect them correctly with suitable cables e Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined command or data e Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code e The projector outputs test data when the power supply is switched ON and when the lamp is lit Ignore this data e Commands are not accepted during warm up e When the data length is greater than indicated by the data length code the projector ignore the excess data code Conversely when the data length is shorter than indicated by the data length code the projector returns the error code to the computer SOMEM COMA Wire wnvey NGOI When the projector connects network the projector can be controlled with RS 232C commands from the computer with web browser For details of
23. 24 INPUT button 26 39 MENU button 39 LENS SHIFT button 129 ZOOM button 29 FOCUS buttons L29 SHADE button 0436 FUNCTION button 0222 29 FILTER indicator 21122 0 SHADE indicator 36 1 SECURITY indicator R293 2 LAMP indicator 21120 121 3 TEMP indicator 21120 121 4 Ports L10 14 1 COMPUTER IN1 port 2 COMPUTER IN2 ports G Y B Cb Pb R Cr Pr H V LAN port USB TYPE A ports USB TYPE B port HDMI 1 port HDMI 2 port COMPONENT ports Y Cb Pb Cr Pr 9 10 11 12 13 14 POWER indicator 124 120 121 7 S VIDEO port 0 VIDEO port 1 AUDIO IN1 port 2 AUDIO IN2 port 3 AUDIO IN3 L R ports 4 AUDIO OUT L R ports 5 MONITOR OUT port 6 REMOTE CONTROL IN port 7 REMOTE CONTROL OUT port 8 CONTROL port 16 continued on next page 17 14 8 13 12 11 15 Part names continued Remote control s m e 7 G X ge Zz 23 VOL buttons 425 24 AV MUTE button 0425 35 25 MAGNIFY ON OFF buttons 35 26 FREEZE button 1136 27 PbyP button 37 28 ASPECT button 127 29 AUTO button 431 30 POSITION button 4130 31 40 31 KEYSTONE button 1132 32 MY BUTTON 1
24. 34 e This is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON 190 Using the A V buttons turns on off the AUTO ECO MODE ON amp OFF AUTO ECO MODE When ON is selected the projector will always be set to Eco mode at start up regardless of the ECO MODE below setting An OSD message AUTO ECO MODE will be displayed for tens of seconds when the projector starts with this function activated Using the A V buttons turns off on the Eco mode NORMAL ECO ECO MODE e When the ECO is selected acoustic noise and screen brightness are reduced e When AUTO ECO MODE above is set to ON the projector will always be set to Eco mode at start up regardless this setting Pressing the button displays the dialog for changing the INSTALLATION setting FRONT DESKTOP 2 REAR DESKTOP s 3 INSTALATION NEAR eee FRONT CEILING Use the A V buttons to select the desired setting on the INSTALLATION dialog and press the ENTER button of the remote control or the INPUT button of the projector to execute If TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON and the INSTALLATION status is changed the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm 2190 will be displayed when the projector is restarted continued on next page 55 ltem scription O O O Using A V buttons switches the standby mode setting between NORMAL and SAVING NORMAL SAVING When SAVING is selected the power consumption in the standby mode is lowered with some functional res
25. distance size distance rmin a max E a max inch m inch cm on cm oF inch m inch cm ao cm am Eri sf s al el alor oao aol 18 1 5 60 1 9 7 arata aheja ata a a aa P 10 4 4 i7 109 103 41 11 5 13 07 20 79 3 0 2 3 92 99 83 33 21 8 119 100 39 25 10 138 116 46 29 11 0 158 133 52 33 13 5 177 149 59 37 15 2 0 1 5 84 96 3 2 3 7 127 120 47 13 5 1 145 137 54 15 _ 6 1 8 1 0 2 7 105 108 4 1 163 154 61 17 7 2 0 1 1 3 0 118 120 4 6 181 171 68 19 8 2 2 1 2 3 3 131 5 0 197 166 65 42 16 180 6 9 271 257 101 29 1 33 1 9 5 0 196 7 5 295 249 98 62 25 239 9 2 361 343 135 38 15 4 4 2 5 6 6 261 10 0 393 332 131 83 33 299 11 5 451 429 169 48 19 5 5 3 1 8 3 326 12 5 491 415 163 104 41 359 13 7 541 514 203 57 23 6 6 3 7 9 9 391 15 0 589 498 196 125 49 597 22 9 901 857 338 95 38 11 1 6 2 16 5 650 24 9 982 830 327 208 82 1024 x 768 10 re Screen height Screen Projection Screen height distance size distance ac cm li 73 46 18 o 61 24 nch cm OF i 80 44 17 6 106 58 23 2 0 27 3 1 46 61 13 86 98 110 122 183 3 1 3 7 4 3 4 9 59 6 2 121 170 107 42 0 of4t oe 17 67 34 146 91 36 0 0113 07 20 80 40 0 of 15 091 24 93 47 194
26. e Point at RETURN in the dialog with the A V buttons and press lt or ENTER button to return to the KEYSTONE menu O PERFECT FIT When PERFECT FIT is pointed at pressing the gt or ENTER button displays the KEYSTONE _ PERFECT FIT dialog This projector is equipped with a test pattern for PERFECT FIT Select the test pattern icon shown in the lower left of the dialog with the lt V buttons When you press the ENTER or INPUT button the test pattern appears or disappears CP X8150 CP X8160 If it is necessary to initialize the current CP WX8240 CP WX8255 adjustment point at RESET in the dialog with the RESET button and press the ENTER or INPUT button 2 Select one of the corners to be adjusted with the A V 4 gt buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button For CP X8150 CP X8160 CP WX8240 and CP WX8255 also the sides can be selected to adjust 41 CO P omm m mmn eal CP SX8350 continued on next page CP WU8440 CP WU8450 33 Correcting the distortion continued 3 Adjust the selected part as below e For adjusting a corner use the A W lt gt buttons to adjust the position of the corner e lt Only for CP X8150 CP X8160 CP WX8240 and CP WX8255 gt For adjusting the upper or lower side use the lt gt buttons to select any one point on the side and use the A V buttons to adjust the distortion of the side e lt Only for CP X8150 CP X8160 CP WX8240 and CP
27. i r Set HDMI 1 AUDIO 2 02 00 Get 00 00 a 01 00 HDMI 2 AUDIO 02 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 02 00 LANGUAGE Set FASE 32 continued on next page CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC aaa Header one Action Wee eating code BE EF Set LANGUAGE 1A 00 1B 00 1C 00 1D 00 PORTUGU S BRA 1E 00 01 00 1F 00 01 00 20 00 NOTE Not all of the languages in this table are supported 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 MENU Reset 00 00 MENU Reset BLANK eu BLANK On Off startup Se Get MyScreen Lock MESSAGE continued on next page 33 CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC a laa i Header one Action Type eating cede set TEMPLATE Tee ee sia Set Ko rte 00 00 00 00 C C MODE 01 00 00 00 T 01 00 Set __2 BE EF 03 06 00 22 62 01 00 02 37 02 00 a 03 00 a NORMAL z A SKIP Get NORMAL MOURGE SKIP S SKIP E Get NORMAL SOURS ok SKIP ai Get NORMAL U arses SKIP i Get NORMAL SOURCE PR SKIP eee Get NORMAL AOUR TARE SKIP dca Get NORMAL POUR ERP a SKIP jiddis Get 61 7A 02 00 34 continued on next page CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC ee Header oe Action Dee eating cede NORMAL SKIP Get NORMAL SKIP Get NORMAL SKIP 02 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 G 02 00 00 00 z 00 00 AUTO PU NER Increment 00 00 aiid Decrement 00 00 01 00 01 00 Set 03 00 01 00 06 00 Get 00 00 USB
28. the guidance by pressing the RESET button on the remote three seconds or more when MAP1 or MAP2 appears continued on next page 63 ltem scription The C C is the function that displays a transcript or dialog of the audio portion of a video files or other presentation or other relevant sounds It is required to have NTSC format video or 480i 60 format component video source supporting C C feature to utilize this function It may not work properly depending on equipment or signal source In this case please turn off the Closed Caption DISPLAY Select Closed Caption DISPLAY setting from following options using A V buttons AUTO amp ON amp OFF ji AUTO Closed Caption automatically appears when the input signal C C compatible from the port with the mute icon set at AUDIO SOURCE is selected ON Closed Caption is on OFF Closed Caption is off e The caption is not displayed when the OSD menu is active e The Closed Caption is the function to display the dialogue narration and or sound effects of a television program or other C C video sources The Closed Caption availability is depending upon Closed Caption broadcaster and or content MODE Select Closed Caption MODE setting from following options using A V buttons CAPTIONS TEXT CAPTIONS Display Closed Caption TEXT Display Text data which is for additional information such as news reports or a TV program guide
29. video signal COLOR e For an HDMI signal this item can also be selected if either 1 or 2 applies 1 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu for selected port is set to VIDEO 2 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu for selected port is set to AUTO and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the tint Reddish Greenish e This item can be selected only for a video s video and component video signal TINT e For an HDMI signal this item can also be selected if either 1 or 2 applies 1 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu for selected port is set to VIDEO 2 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu for selected port is set to AUTO and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals continued on next page 45 Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the sharpness Weak Strong e There may be some noise and or the screen may flicker for a moment when an adjustment is made This is not a malfunction Using the A cursor buttons changes the active iris control mode PRESENTATION amp THEATER OFF _ PRESENTATION The active iris displays the best presentation ACTIVE IRIS image for both bright and dark scenes THEATER The active iris displays the best theater image for both bright and dark scenes OFF The active iris is always open e The screen may flicker when the PRESENTATION or THEATER modes are selected If this occurs select O
30. 7 1 E mail Alerts continued 5 Click the Alert Settings on the main menu to configure the E mail Alerts settings 6 Select and configure each alert item Refer to item 3 1 6 Alert Settings 31 for further information 7 Click the Apply button to save the settings Failure Warning e mails are formatted as follows Subject line lt Mail title gt lt Projector name gt Text lt Mail text gt Date lt Failure Warning date gt Time lt Failure Warning time gt IP Address lt Projector IP address gt MAC Address lt Projector MAC address gt of 7 2 Projector Management using SNMP The SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol enables to manage the projector information which is a failure or warning status from the computer on the network The SNMP management software will be required on the computer to use this function NOTE It is recommended that SNMP functions be carried out by a network administrator e SNMP management software must be installed on the computer to monitor the projector via SNMP SNMP Settings 2123 Configure the following items via a web browser to use SNMP Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser and select Projector Web Control from the selection window 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click th
31. A W lt gt buttons adjusts the menu position To quit the operation press the MENU button on the remote control or keep no operation for about 10 seconds Using the A V buttons switches the BLANK screen The BLANK screen is displayed for the AV MUTE function 25 It is displayed by pressing the AV MUTE button on the remote control MyScreen amp ORIGINAL BLUE WHITE BLACK eee MyScreen Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item L160 ORIGINAL Screen preset as the standard screen BLUE WHITE BLACK Plain screens in each color e To avoid remaining as an afterimage the MyScreen or ORIGINAL screen will change to the plain black screen after several minutes Using the A V buttons switches the mode for the start up screen The start up screen is a screen displayed when no signal or an unsuitable signal is detected MyScreen ORIGINAL OFF Ue lu MyScreen Screen can be registered by the MyScreen item L460 ORIGINAL Screen preset as the standard screen OFF Plain black screen e To avoid remaining as an afterimage the MyScreen or ORIGINAL screen will change to the BLANK screen above after several minutes If also the BLANK screen is the MyScreen or ORIGINAL the plain black screen is instead used e When the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in the SECURITY menu 488 the START UP is fixed to MyScreen continued on next page 59 ltem scription This item allows
32. CAUTION result possibly in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling Typical Symbols A This symbol indicates an additional warning including cautions An illustration is provided to clarify the contents This symbol indicates a prohibited action The contents will be clearly indicated in an illustration or nearby the symbol to the left indicates that disassembly is prohibited This symbol indicates a compulsory action The contents will be clearly indicated in an illustration or nearby the symbol to the left indicates that the power plug should be disconnected from the power outlet Safety Precautions WARNING Never use the projector if a problem should occur Abnormal operations such as smoke strange odor no image no sound excessive sound damaged casing or elements or cables penetration of liquids or foreign matter etc can cause a fire or electrical shock In such case immediately turn off the power switch and then disconnect the power plug from the power outlet After making sure that the smoke or odor has stopped contact your dealer Never attempt to make repairs yourself because this could be dangerous e The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible Use special caution for children and pets Incorrect handling could result in fire electrical shock injury burn or vision problem Use special caution in households where children and pets are present
33. HIGH 2 HIGH 1 NORMAL amp AUTO ee e AUTO The projector changes the rotation speed automatically to suit the altitude and other environmental factors Choose an option below when there is a trouble with the AUTO mode NORMAL This mode can be used below 1600m 5250ft HIGH 1 This mode can be used between 1600 to 2300m 5250 to 7550ft HIGH 2 This mode can be used above 2300m 7550ft AUTO ADJUST Using the A V buttons to select one of the mode When the DISABLE is selected the automatic adjustment feature is disabled FINE amp FAST DISABLE O SERVICE FINE Finer tuning including H SIZE adjustment FAST Faster tuning setting H SIZE to prearranged data for the input signal e Depending on conditions such as input image signal cable to the projector environment around the projector etc the automatic adjustment may not work correctly In such a case please choose DISABLE to disable the automatic adjustment and make adjustment manually GHOST 1 Select a color element of ghost using the lt P gt buttons 2 Adjust the selected element using the A V buttons to disappear ghost continued on next page 69 o ltem Description FILTER MESSAGE Use the A V button to set the timer for notifying by the message when to replace the filter unit CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 1000h 2000h 5000h amp 10000h amp 15000h amp OFF CP X8160 CP WX8255 C
34. IP address e The projector s IP address can be changed by using the configuration utility via a web browser L421 e If the projector and the computer exist in the same network i e same network address you can leave the default gateway field blank e When the projector and the computer exist in different networks the default gateway must be set Consult to the network administrator in detail m Setting automatically When a DHCP server exists in the connected network it is possible to assign an IP address to the projector and computer automatically DHCP is abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and has the function to provide necessary setting for network like IP address from server to client A server that has DHCP function is called DHCP server continued on next page 1 3 Manual network connection setting Wired LAN continued 1 3 3 Internet Option setting 1 Click Internet Options in Network and Sharing Center window to open Internet Properties window 2 Click Connections tab and then click LAN settings button to open Local Area Network LAN Settings 3 Uncheck all boxes in Local Area Network LAN Settings window After setting is complete click OK to close the window 10 1 4 Manual network connection setting Wireless LAN Using the designated USB wireless adapter option on the projector enables the projector and c
35. LAN function To eliminate communication problems please use a Wi Fi certified wireless network device 1 1 2 Hardware and software requirement for computer To connect your computer to the projector and use the network function of the projector your computer needs to meet the following requirements v OS One of the following Windows XP Home Edition Professional Edition Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate Enterprise Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate Enterprise v CPU Pentium 4 2 8 GHz or higher v Graphic card 16 bit XGA or higher When using the LiveViewer it is recommended that the display resolution of your computer is set to 1024 x 768 v Memory 512 MB or higher v Hard disk space 100 MB or higher v Web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher v CD ROM DVD ROM drive 1 1 System requirements continued NOTE The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item is set to SAVING Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL EQSETUP menu in the Operating Guide e You can get the latest version of the applications for the network functions of the projector and the latest information for this product from the Hitachi website http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com 1 2 Quick conne
36. Network Control Port1 Port 23 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 23 Configures command control port 1 Port 23 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required Authentication for this port Network Control Port2 Port 9715 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 9715 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Configures command control port 2 Port 9715 Authentication PJLink Port Port 4352 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 4352 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Configures the PJLink port Port 4352 Authentication My Image Port Port 9716 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 9716 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Configures the My Image Port Port 9716 Authentication Messenger Port Port 9719 Port open Click the Enable check box to use port 9719 Click the Enable check box when authentication is required for this port Configures the Messenger Port Port 97 19 Authentication continued on next page 22 3 1 Projector Web Control Port Settings continued Item Description SNMP Port Configures the SNMP port Port open Click the Enable check box to use SNMP Configures the destination of the SNMP Trap in IP format
37. None IP address 192 168 10 254 You can change these settings via a web browser on your computer or from the menu of the projector Refer to the item 3 1 3 Network Settings 1120 or NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide 1 Select Change adapter settings from the menu on the left side of the Network and Sharing Center window 2 Right click Wireless Network Connection to open the k a n a a a trimeri a 7 i aia a a si tes in i menu and select Properties TEA a k gt 3 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and click Properties continued on next page 12 1 4 Manual network connection setting Wireless LAN continued 4 Select Use the following IP address and configure the IP m address Subnet mask and Default gateway for the computer accordingly After setting is complete click OK to close the window About IP address The Network address portion of the IP address setting on your computer must be the same as the setting on the projector Also the entire IP address on the computer must not overlap with that of the other devices on the same network including the projector For example The projector s settings are as follows IP address 192 168 10 254 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Network address 192 168 10 in this case Therefore specify the computer s IP address as follows IP address 192 168 10 xxx xxx shows decimal number Subnet
38. Only use the power cord that came with the projector If it is damaged consult your dealer to get a new one Never modify the power cord e Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power cord The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible Remove the power cord for complete separation e Do not distribute the power supply to multiple devices Doing so may overload the outlet and connectors loosen the connection or result in fire electric shock or other accidents e Connect the ground terminal for the AC inlet of this unit to the ground terminal of the building using an appropriate power cord bundled NOTICE gt This product is also designed for IT power systems with a phase to phase voltage of 220 to 240 V 8 Turning on the power 1 Make sure that the power cord is firmly and correctly connected to the projector and the outlet E POWER indicat 2 Make sure that the POWER indicator is a lighted in steady orange Then remove the J UU lens cover 3 Press the STANDBY ON button on a ENGLISH i the projector or the ON button on the remote control The projection lamp will light up and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in green When the power is completely on the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green STANDBY ON Ol STANDBY ON button AWAR
39. PRESENTATION For details refer to the manual for LiveViewer If you set one or more computers to the Multi PC mode on LiveViewer and send their images to the projector you can select the display mode on the projector from two options below Single PC mode displays the image of the selected computer on full screen Multi PC mode displays the images sent from up to four computers on screen that is divided into quarter sections Select this item to display a dialog MULTI PC Use the dialog to change the display mode as MODE explained below e To change from Multi PC MULTIPC MODE mode to Single PC mode select HEEE one of computers in the dialog using the A W lt P gt buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button Press the button to choose OK and then press ENTER or INPUT again The image for the selected computer is displayed on full screen continued on next page continued on next page 85 ltem scription O e To change from Single PC mode to Multi PC mode press button to choose OK in the dialog and press the ENTER or INPUT button The display mode is changed e For details on how to switch the display mode to Multi PC mode on your computer refer to the manual for LiveViwer e The Presenter mode setting of the selected computer becomes valid when the display mode is changed to Single PC mode eT EES ince 7 PRESENTATION Also the Presenter mode setting ial continued
40. RS 232C commands refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table 19 NOTE If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time the projector may not be able to process the data correctly Connection 4 Turn off the projector and the computer 2 If you use wired LAN connect the projector s LAN port to the computer s LAN port with a LAN cable Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure If you use wireless LAN insert the USB wireless adapter into one of the USB TYPE A ports of the projector 3 Turn the computer on and after the computer has started up turn the projector on USB wireless adapter LAN cable CAT 5 or greater Communicaion Port The following two ports are assigned for the command control TCP 23 TCP 9715 Configure the following items form a web browser when command control is used Port Settings Network Control Port1 Port 23 Port open Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port1 Port 23 to use TCP 23 Default setting is Enable Authentication Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required Default setting is Disable Network Control Port2 Port 9715 Port open Authentication Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port2 Port 9715 to use TCP 9715 Default setting is Enable Click the Enable check box for th
41. SUBNET SETUP MASK continued DNS SERVER continued on next page 77 ltem scription Use the A lt P gt buttons to enter the Year last two digits Month Date Hour and Minute e When this item is set the same item in the WIRED SETUP menu is overwritten with the same setting 482 DATE AND The projector will override this setting and retrieve TIME DATE AND TIME information from the Time server when SNTP is enabled 3 1 8 Date Time Settings in the Network Guide e This setting will be reset if the projector is turned off while STANDBY MODE in the SETUP menu is set to SAVING 456 or when the AC power is turned off Use the A V buttons to select the channel of the wireless LAN to be used while MODE 76 is set to ADHOC Select according to the settings of your computer The channels 1 to 11 are available To save the setting press the gt button WIRELESS e The available channels would be various SETUP depending on a country In addition wireless continued network card might be required due to the standard e This item can only be selected when MODE is set to ADHOC When MODE is set to INFRASTRUCTURE the channel is automatically selected Use the A V buttons to select the encryption method to be used WPA2 PSK AES WPA2 PSK TKIP 2 2 OFF WPA PSK AES 2 amp WEP 64bit WEP 128bite WPA PSK TKIP To save the setting press the gt button e When MODE 76 is set to ADHOC e
42. Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large The 10 digit inquiring code will be displayed inside the box 3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit inquiring code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed continued on next page 91 ltem scription 1 Use the A buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT DISPLAY and press the gt or ENTER button to display the MY TEXT DISPLAY on off menu FEX 2 Use the A V buttons on the MY TEXT DISPLAY on off menu to select on or off MY TEXT ON OFF ee el When it is set ON the MY TEXT will be displayed on the START UP screen and the INPUT _ INFORMATION when the INFORMATION on the SERVICE menu is chosen e This function is available only when the MY TEXT PASSWORD function is set to the OFF 1 Use the A buttons on the SECURITY menu to select the MY TEXT WRITING and press the gt button The MY TEXT WRITING dialog will be displayed 2 The current MY TEXT will be displayed on the first 3 lines If not yet written the lines will be blank Use the A W lt gt buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time press the RESET button or press the lt and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT button MY TEXT 1 character or all characters will be WRITING erased The MY
43. TEE OE 0 5 208 11 or 16 64 24 60 13 osl 20 77 29 701 15 0 9 26 29 3 2 48 2 3 89 102 3 4 3 9 6 4 8 0 97 16 1 633 24 3 254 317 380 9 1 12 1 14 6 383 337 132 67 26 4 1 3 0 7 3 287 11 0 478 421 166 84 33 5 1 3 8 9 1 359 13 7 573 505 199 101 40 6 1 4 6 10 9 430 16 5 955 841 331 168 66 10 2 7 6 27 5 433 541 649 1081 CP WX8255 with ML 703 1280 x 800 10 Oo o OAB O O ch oF zo 88 51 20 117 68 27 146 85 33 175 102 40 2 204 119 47 9 233 135 53 ace cm inch cm i 78 45 18 dufoja 2 2 103 60 24 6 2 0 8 0 6 1 5 59 3 0 129 75 29 7 3 10 os 1 9 73 37 154 90 3 9 4 1 2 o9 22 88 44 180 103 206 120 47 12 5 1 6 1 2 3 0 117 5 9 231 132 6 6 262 152 60 129 6 5 257 150 59 15 6 2 0 1 5 3 7 147 7 4 zai 1o e7 194 220 259 13 0 513 299 118 30 12 4 1 3 0 7 4 293 14 7 JEEE 323 16 3 641 374 147 37 145 5 1 3 8 9 3 366 18 4 725 423 167 42 17 388 19 5 769 449 177 45 18 6 1 4 6 22 1 870 508 200 51 20 646 32 5 1281 731 36 8 1450 soi 44 07 16 65 60 13 08 20 78 2 3 91 2 6 104 3 3 3 9 46 az 7 15 0 9 3 0 117 33 49 6 6 8 2 9 8 16 4 Projector top J B x V Screen size Projection distance from the front of the projector unit
44. TEXT can be input up to 24 characters on each line 3 To change an already inserted character press the A V button to move the cursor to one of the first 3 lines and use the lt P gt buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button the character is selected Then follow the same procedure as described at the item 2 above 4 To finish entering text move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previous MY TEXT without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the lt ENTER or INPUT button e The MY TEXT WRITING function is available only when the MY TEXT PASSWORD function is set to OFF eCENIT continued on next page 92 ttem escription Selecting this item displays the SECURITY INDICATOR dialog Use the A V buttons to select ON or OFF SECURITY ON amp OFF INDICATOR When ON is selected while PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON the SECURITY indicator blinks in yellow in the standby mode 289 90 Selecting this item displays the STACK LOCK dialog For more STACK LOCK information please see Instant Stack Guide 93 RESMEN OKO KS The projector has the following convenient tools that enable on screen presentations easily and quickly PC LESS Presentation ELibelow Drawing function L104 USB Display 21109 Network Presentation For details of Netwo
45. The information covers the entire screen Not all of the C C program has Text information CHANNEL Select Closed Caption CHANNEL from following options using A V buttons 1828384 Channel 1 primary channel language Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 The channel data may vary depending on the content Some channel might be used for secondary language or empty A I N 64 ORON Taner From the OPTION menu items shown in the table MAGE AUTOSEARCH OFF below can be performed SETUP DRECT POERON OFF Dein Select an item using the A V cursor buttons and press the cursor button or ENTER button to execute Pia LP THE h the item except for the items LAMP TIME and FILTER Riise i he TIME Then perform it according to the following table UTERIN 1 th USS DISPLAY The ports can be set to be ignored in searching by the AUTO SEARCH function below or in selecting id buttons on the control panel 1 Choose a picture input port using the A V buttons SOURCE SKIP 2 Using the lt buttons turns on off the SOURCE SKIP function NORMAL amp SKIP The port that is set to SKIP will be ignored e It is not possible to set SKIP to all ports at the same time e This setting is not valid when in the PbyP mode 437 Using the A V buttons turns on off the automatic signal search function ON amp OFF When the ON is selected detecting no signal automatically cycles through input ports in the f
46. WX8255 gt For adjusting the left or right side use the A V buttons to select any one point on the side and use the lt P gt buttons to adjust the distortion of the side e To adjust another corner or side press the ENTER or INPUT button and follow the procedure from step 2 4 This projector is equipped with a memory feature for PERFECT FIT adjustment Up to 3 sets of adjustments can be stored e SAVE To store the current PERFECT FIT adjustment select one of the SAVE icons numbered 1 to 3 number of the memory with the lt A buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be lost by saving new data into the memory e LOAD To recall stored adjustments select one of the LOAD icons f numbered 1 to 3 number of the memory with the lt A buttons and press the ENTER or INPUT button Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by loading data if you want to keep the current adjustment please save it before performing a LOAD function NOTE lt Only for CP X8150 CP X8160 CP WX8240 and CP WX8255 gt Each corner and side can be adjusted individually but in some cases it may be adjusted in conjunction with another corner or side This is due to control restrictions and not a malfunction e The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are skipped e There may be some noise and the screen may flicker fora moment when loading data This is n
47. Windows Windows Vista and Aero are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e Adobe and Flash are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation e JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc e HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries e Crestron Crestron e Control e Control Crestron RoomView and RoomView are trademarks or registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics Inc in TM e Trademark PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in F lLink Japan the United States of America and other countries and areas the United States and other countries All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners 1 ae AUIIOUD ESEE a A T E EN E E E A 1 Connection to the network ccccseceseeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeneseneseneneeees 5 1 1 System requirements cau cacexdencavesedennduichemessiv satwewsdsledudeddalactesanavnessocsesdusnstameane 5 1 1 1 Required equipment preparation i cetere settee cers etesasancewaneeceeinardcadeswrndbsindleasmscuvesnauanwnandecnets 5 1 1 2 Hardware and software requirement for computer ccccceececceeeeceeeeeceeseesseeeeseueeeees 5 1 2 QUICK COINS CIN ON areca des cence E E 6 1 3 Manual network connect
48. You can restart the network connection from Network Restart on the main menu 41 e If you connect the projector to an existing network consult a network administrator before setting server addresses e Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode SETUP menu in the Operating Guide or the AC power the current date and time setting is reset e To enable the SNTP function the time difference must be set The projector will retrieve Date and Time information from the time server and override time settings when SNTP is enabled e The internal clock s time may not remain accurate Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time 31 3 1 Projector Web Control continued Displays and configures passwords and other security settings pmp p r kam a min 2 sh Si El ee er Acioun ae e a la aA Sy ey E e py an pe er epee Item Description User Account Configures the user name and password Configures the user name User name The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters Configures the password Password The length of the text can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Re enter Password Reenter the above password for verification Configures the Authentication password for Network Control Port1 Port 23 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 PJLink Port Port 4352 My Image Port Port 9716 and Messenger Port Port 9719 122 23
49. and take the necessary actions to resolve the problem continued on next page 21 STACK menu settings 3 7 Important information for Intellectual Stack continued Example Cover Error Lamp cover is opened Cover Error Lamp Error Lamp Error Lamp does not light up Fan Error Problem with cooling fan J a Fan Error Temp Error Temperature of the projector is too EWA Temp Error high o Air Flow Error Temperature of the projector is too high check that the exhaust vents are not blocked Filter Error The reading on the filter timer exceeds the hours set in the FILTER i amp Filter Error MESSAGE menu EQOperating Guide EXT OPTION menu SERVICE Cold Error The ambient temperature is too ita Cold Error low EX Air Flow Error e f you need to turn off a projector for reasons such as taking corrective actions for an error turn off both the projectors so that Intellectual Stack can be started properly when the projectors are turned on again e f the PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR security function on both projectors is set to ON both projectors will turn on Enter the security code for Main first then followed by Sub If ALTERNATE mode is selected one of the projectors will turn off automatically Operating Guide SECURITY menu e f the PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR security function on one of the projectors is set to ON it is necessary to enter the security code as follows when t
50. approach them for a while since too hot 2 Regulatory notices About Electro Magnetic Interference This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures ENGLISH iz This product may cause interference if used in residential areas Such use must be avoided unless the user takes special measures to reduce electromagnetic emissions to prevent interference to the reception of radio and television broadcasts In Canada This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 In the US and places where the FCC regulations are applicable This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a r
51. area e When in the PbyP mode use the MENU button on the remote control or A V buttons on the control panel to display the OSD menu e There are certain functions that cannot be used when in the PbyP mode e A message will be displayed when buttons that cannot be used are pressed 21119 However note that there are certain unusable buttons for which messages are not displayed e The functions on the OSD menu that cannot be used are displayed in gray and cannot be selected O Setting information The setting information will be appeared for several seconds when the PbyP function is started Displays the input information for each area A yellow frame around the main area and an audio mark indicating the audio output will also be displayed The information can be redisplayed with the lt P gt buttons after it has been erased Audio mark Frame sub area Input information O Changing the main area The position of the main area can be toggled with the lt gt buttons when the setting information is displayed on the screen The yellow frame and the audio mark will move together with it continued on next page 37 PbyP Picture by Picture lt Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 gt continued O Changing the picture input signal Press any button to select an input port on the remote control or press the INPUT button on the control panel A dialog box to select the input signal for the main area will be displayed
52. au GAMMA a tala a continued on next page 21 CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC ee Header oe Action L Ore eating cede a User GAMMA eyecui BE EF o6 00 58 c2 06 oo 50 70 00 00 Point 1 Reset BE EF 06 00 F4 FF 02 00 91 30 00 00 saa GAMMA ronan a User GAMMA Exacte BEEF o6 00 A4 c3 o6 oo 51 70 o0 00 Point 2 Reset BE EF B 00 00 0 0 0 9 amma ren om 0 9 F E User GAMMA Execute BE EF 06 00 Eo c3 06 00 52 70 00 00 Point 3 Reset BE EF 06 00 00 00 E r a on E OF 7 F User GAMMA Execute BE EF 06 00 1c c2 o6 00 53 70 00 00 Point 4 Reset BE EF 06 00 02 00 94 30 00 00 F F i GaMMa ren 04 00 ik User GAMMA Eyecuie BE EF o6 00 68 c3 06 00 54 70 00 00 Point 5 Reset BE EF 06 00 02 00 95 30 00 00 GAMMA rroi User GAMMA Execute BE EF 03 06 00 94 c2 06 00 55 70 00 00 Point 6 Reset BE EF 06 00 80 FE 02 00 96 30 00 00 oo sce User GAMMA Execute BE EF o6 00 po c2 06 oo 56 70 00 00 Point 7 Reset BE EF 06 00 7C FF 02 00 97 30 00 00 GAMMA rrei om User GAMMA Execute BE EF 03 06 00 2c c3 06 00 57 70 00 00 Point 8 Reset 22 continued on next page CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC aaa Header oe Action Type eating cede BE EF 03 m COLOR TEMP 3B F2 0A 00 1A 00 00 00 00 00 GOTOR TEME 00 00 aaa 00 00 COLOR TEMP ae COLOR TEMP Ex
53. back to the previous resolution without saving changes move the cursor to CANCEL on screen and press the lt or ENTER button The screen will then return to the RESOLUTION menu displaying the previous resolution e For some pictures this function may not work well 53 SSW menmu SELECT From the SETUP menu items shown in the table F PICTURE Se ere eae KE below can be performed Select an item using the A V cursor buttons and press the cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table ps ttem scription Selecting this item performs the Automatic keystone distortion correction Projector automatically corrects vertical keystone distortion due to the forward backward setup angle by itself This function will be executed only once when selected in the menu When the slant of the projector is changed execute this function again e The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs For some input this function may not work well e When the projector is in one of the following conditions the automatic vertical keystone correction feature may not work AUTO KEYSTONE correctly or at all REAR CEILING or FRONT CEILING is selected for the INSTALLATION item in the SETUP menu and the projector screen is slanted or tilted downwards The ZOOM adjustment is not set to the full WIDE wide angle focus The projector is nearly horizontal abou
54. byte 65 7 4 Command Control via the Network continued Automatic Connection Break The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no communication for 30 seconds after being established Authentication The projector does not accept commands without authentication success when authentication is enabled The projector uses a challenge response type authentication with an MD5 Message Digest 5 algorithm When the projector is using a LAN a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled Bind this received 8 bytes and the Authentication Password and digest this data with the MD5 algorithm and add this in front of the commands to send Following is a sample if the Authentication Password is set to password and the random 8 bytes are a5 72f60c 1 Connect the projector 2 Receive the random 8 bytes a572f60c from the projector 3 Bind the random 8 bytes a572f60c and the Authentication Password password and it becomes a5 2f60cpassword 4 Digest this bind a572f60cpassword with MD5 algorithm It will be e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde 5 Add this e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde in front of the commands and send the data Send e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde command 6 When the sending data is correct the command will be performed and the reply data will be returned Otherwise an authentication error will be returne
55. characters are used the input text or numbers cannot be set correctly e All items on this window cannot be left blank 1 Crestron Control Configures the settings of Crestron control system devices ltem eseription IP Address Configures the IP address of the control system IP ID Configures the IP ID of the control system Specifies the port number used for communication by the control system Port To apply the settings click the Send button 2 Projector Configures the network settings of the projector ltem Description Projector Name Configures the name of the projector The length of the J Projector Name can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters Location Configures the location name of the projector You can specify a Location name up to 32 alphanumeric characters Configures the user name for the projector You can specify a Assigned te user name up to 32 alphanumeric characters The usable symbols are space and the following amp lt gt _ To apply the settings click the Send button 45 3 2 Crestron e Controf Tools window continued 3 Projector continued Configures the network settings of the projector Stem Description O O O O O SO DHCP Enables DHCP IP Address Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled Subnet Mask Configures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled Default Gateway Configures the default gateway when DHCP is d
56. device because the built in pointing device may have priority to this function e Windows 95 OSR 2 1 or higher is required for this function And also this function may not work depending on the computer s configurations and mouse drivers This function can work with the computer which can operate general USB mouse or keyboard e You cannot do things like press two buttons at once for instance pressing two buttons at the same time to move the mouse pointer diagonally e This function is activated only when the projector is working properly This function is not available in any of the following cases While the lamp is warming up The POWER indicator blinks in green When either USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B is selected as the input source While displaying BLANK 22159 TEMPLATE 62163 or MY IMAGE E484 screen When any menu is displayed on the screen While using the cursor buttons to operate the sound or screen functions such as adjusting the sound volume correcting the keystone correcting the picture position and magnifying the screen SEIS VOMON lt Only for CP X8160 CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 gt The Status Monitor is the sub LCD in the rear panel of Status Monitor CP X8160 CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 The Status Monitor displays the present condition of the projector including errors setup information and error history Ol Ooo oo oo Displaying the condition of the projector If no bu
57. display resolution In such a case use an external display device You may be able to see the dialog and set an appropriate display resolution continued on next page 11 Connecting with your devices continued Computer External ie RS 232C RS 232C device Access JV LeO _ Ol lO po R L76 E USB wireless i a adapter IN USB TYPE A gt optional m te fa 76 it iT j l re TYPEB ae OA COMPUTER IN rm DEO L AUDIO IN3 i i O S RICHIPr USB AUDIO IN 1 COMPUTER IN 1 oy storage CONTROL Y COMPONENT o device Aaa _ _O_ 094 104 ll Oe Smee i REMOTE CONTROL AWARNING gt Heat may build up in the USB wireless adapter to avoid pos sible burns disconnect the projector power cord for 10 minutes before touching the adapter gt When using the USB wireless adapter be sure to connect the adapter to the fur ther USB TYPE A port from the LAN port and use the supplied adapter cover 1115 4 CAUTION gt Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to obtain the consent of the administrator of the network gt Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive voltage gt The designated USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required to use the wireless network function of this proj
58. displayed and the icon disappears from the Windows notification area Quit The application is closed and the icon disappears from the Windows notification area 300 PM NOTE If you wish to restart the application you need to unplug the USB cable and plug it again Floating menu If you select Display on the Right Click menu the Floating menu shown in the right LiveViewer Lite will appear on your computer screen for 1 Start capture button The transmission to the projector is started and the images will be displayed 2 C 2 Stop capture button The image transmission is stopped 3 Hold button The image on the projector s screen is temporally frozen The last image before the button is clicked is remained on the screen You can revise the image data on your computer without showing it on the projector s screen 4 Option button The Options window is displayed 5 Minimize button The Floating menu is closed and the icon reappears in the Windows notification area NOTE Images may not be displayed on screen if the start stop capture buttons are clicked repeatedly 111 USB Display continued Options window If you select the Option button on the Floating menu the Options window is displayed Settings About Optimize Performance Transmission speed Optimize Performance PRESE TERA The LiveViewer Lite for USB captures screenshots T in JPEG data and sends them to t
59. either 1 or 2 applies 1 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu for selected port is set to VIDEO 2 HDMI FORMAT item in the INPUT menu for selected port is set to AUTO and the projector recognizes that it receives video signals Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the vertical position Down Up e Over adjusting the vertical position may cause noise to appear on the screen If this occurs please reset the vertical position to the default setting Pressing the RESET button when the V POSITION V POSITION is selected will reset the V POSITION to the default setting e When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video signal the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN above setting It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10 e This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A B or HDMI 1 2 port Using the lt buttons adjusts the horizontal position Right Left e Over adjusting the horizontal position may cause noise to appear on the screen If this occurs please reset the horizontal position to the default setting Pressing the RESET button when the H POSITION is H POSITION selected will reset the H POSITION to the default setting e When this function is performed on a video signal or an s video signal the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN above setting It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10 e This function is unavail
60. follow the same procedure as described at the item 1 above 3 To finish entering text move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previous name without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the lt ENTER or INPUT button continued on next page 79 ltem scription Selecting this item displays the WIRELESS INFORMATION dialog for viewing the wireless LAN settings Use the A V buttons to switch the page The first page shows the wireless LAN settings The second and subsequent pages display the signal information of wireless LAN connection devices WIRELESS INFORMATION FOr details of PASSCODE refer to the manual for LiveViewer e Nothing blank is shown in the PROJECTOR NAME 83 and SSID 4179 field until you setup those items Only the first 16 characters of the PROJECTOR NAME e IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate 0 0 0 0 in the following condition 1 The USB wireless adapter is not inserted into the projector 2 DHCP is ON and the projector does not get address from DHCP server e Nothing blank is shown in the CH and SPEED fields if the USB wireless adapter is not inserted e The actual performance and setting will be shown in the CH field instead of the setting value in the WIRELESS SETUP menu e An icon is displayed to the left of the SSID of the device connected to the projector
61. in spite of occurred error in the error log 23 POWER indi Powernon oft O indicator To STANDBY button Turning on the power a GJ ON button 1 Make sure that the power cord is firmly and correctly connected to the projector Tee and the outlet eae P Make sure that the POWER indicator is P lighted in steady orange 1120 Then remove the lens cover 3 Press STANDBY ON button on the projector or the ON button on the remote control The projection lamp will light up and POWER indicator will begin blinking in green When the power is completely on the indicator will stop blinking and light in steady green 41120 To display the picture select an input signal according to the section Selecting an input signal 126 Z U TEMP POWER STANDBY ON STANDBY ON button Turning off the power 4 Press the STANDBY ON button on the projector or the STANDBY button on the remote control The message Power off will appear on the screen for about 5 seconds 2 Press the STANDBY ON or STANDBY button again while the message appears The projector lamp will go off and the POWER indicator will begin blinking in orange Then the POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp cooling is complete L120 3 Attach the lens cover after the POWER indicator turns to steady orange Do not turn the projector on for ab
62. in SECURITY menu 488 e This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A B or HDMI 1 2 port e Drawing with Drawing function cannot be captured 4104 continued on next page 60 ltem scription Using the A V buttons turns on off the MyScreen lock function ON amp OFF MyScreen Lock When the ON is selected the item MyScreen is locked Use this function for protecting the current MyScreen e This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item in SECURITY menu 488 Using the A V buttons turns on off the message function ON amp OFF When the ON is selected the following message function works AUTO IN PROGRESS while automatically adjusting NO INPUT IS DETECTED SYNC IS OUT OF RANGE INVALID SCAN FREQ NOT AVAILABLE FOCUS Searching while searching for the input Detecting while an input signal is detected AUTO ECO MODE while starting up with AUTO ECO MODE The indication of the input signal displayed by changing The indication of the aspect ratio displayed by changing The indication of the PICTURE MODE displayed by changing The indication of the ACTIVE IRIS displayed by changing The indication of the MY MEMORY displayed by changing The indication of FREEZE and II while freezing the screen by pressing the FREEZE button The indication of the TEMPLATE displayed by changing The indicati
63. in a dark cool and dry play e Do not short circuit the battery e Do not recharge disassemble or solder the battery e Do not give the battery a physical impact e Use only the battery specified in the other manual of this projector e Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading the battery e If you observe a leakage of the battery wipe out the flower and then replace the battery If the flower adheres your body or clothes rinse well with water e Obey the local laws on disposing the battery CAUTION Be careful in moving the projector Neglect could result in an injury or damage e Do not move the projector during use Before moving disconnect the power cord and all external connections and close the slide lens door or attach the lens cap e Avoid any impact or shock to the projector e Do not drag the projector e For moving the projector use the enclosed case or bag if provided Do not put anything on top of the projector Placing anything on the projector could result in loss of balance or falling and cause an injury or damage Use special caution in households where children are present Do not attach anything other than specified things to the projector Neglect could result in an injury or damage e Some projector has a screw thread in a lens part Do not attach anything other than specified options such as conversion lens to the screw thread Avoid a smoky humid or dusty
64. is not connected to the network or the computer while the LAN or USB TYPE B port is selected continued on next page 20 Displaying the condition of the projector continued Displays supplied voltage and peripheral temperature in Celsius 3rd line while the lamp is on NOTE While the projector is searching an input signal or USB TYPE A ports are selected in normal condition nothing is displayed on the 2nd line of the monitor e When the USB TYPE B port is selected even if MOUSE is selected in the USB TYPE B item of the OPTION menu NO SIGNAL is displayed on the 2nd line of the monitor 67 e Displayed temperature might differ from actual peripheral temperature because the displayed temperature is measured inside of the projector O In error state The Status Monitor displays a warning of an error with larger letters Resolve the errors referring to the table of the sections Related messages 11119 and Regarding the indicator lamps 4120 121 when the warning is displayed Displayed warnings are as below COVER The lamp cover has not been properly fixed Refer to the LAMP indicator blinking in the table 21120 FAN The cooing fan is not operating Refer to the TEMP indicator blinking in the table 4121 LAMP The lamp does not light Refer to the LAMP indicator lighting in the table 120 TEMP The projector s interior becomes over heated Refer to the TEMP indicator lighting in t
65. is required e If JavaScript is disabled in your web browser configuration you must enable JavaScript in order to use the projector web pages properly See the Help files for your web browser for details on how to enable JavaScript e It is recommended that all web browser updates are installed e If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time the projector may not be able to process the data correctly Refer to the following for configuring or controlling the projector via a web browser Make sure that your computer and the projector is connected via network and then start Web browser Enter the projector s IP address into URL input box of the Web browser as the example below and then press the Enter key or button Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser and press the Enter key or och gt gernon If a correct URL is input and the r projector and your computer are connected to the same network iain hae correctly the selection window as Crestron e Cont shown on the right will be displayed You can choose to use Projector Web Control or Crestron e Control as a tool for controlling the projector Click one of them For more details refer to 3 1 Projector Web Control 2117 or 3 2 Crestron e Control 142 NOTE Do not attempt to control the projector with the projector s menu or remote cont
66. it may not be possible to superimpose the images well enough depending on the input signals In this case try the following methods Press the AUTO button on the remote control or execute AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE MoOperating Guide IMAGE menu on each of the projectors Adjust H POSITION and V POSITION MoOperating Guide IMAGE menu on each of the projectors Check the RESOLUTION setting in the INPUT menu and change to the same setting if the setting differs between Main and Sub EQOperating Guide INPUT menu 12 3 SUZNG LC menu settings Set the Intellectual Stack operation using the STACK menu NOTE If you are using Simple Stack without RS 232C connection skip this chapter e If you do not need to change the settings made during the installation explained prior to this chapter go to 3 3 Selecting lamp operation mode 175 e Read 3 7 Important information for Intellectual Stack carefully E20 3 1 Displaying STACK menu Use the A W lt b buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION _ STACK gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION gt STACK Esee or STACK menu will appear on screen SUB INPUT SOURCE PLANA CQOperating Guide OPTION menu The il setting for Intellectual Stack operation starts from this menu NOTE Check that the following settings are made on both projectors Otherwise STACK menu on the projectors cannot be operated M5 STANDBY MODE i
67. item can t be selected for no signal and sync out e When the MY TEXT DISPLAY is set to ON the MY TEXT is displayed together with the input information in the INPUT_INFORMATION box 4192 FACTORY RESET Selecting OK using the button performs this function By this function all the items in all of menus will collectively return to the initial setting Note that the items LAMP TIME FILTER TIME LANGUAGE FILTER MESSAGE STANDBY MODE COMMUNICATION NETWORK and SECURITY settings are not reset CANCEL gt OK 19 NTI AAOVR SS Tanker Remember that incorrect network settings on this projector may cause trouble on the network Be sure to consult with your network administrator before Kee connecting to an existing access point on your network Ess Select NETWORK from the main menu to access the following functions Select an item using the A V cursor buttons on the projector or remote control and press the cursor button on the projector or remote control or ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table See the Network Guide for details of NETWORK operation NOTE To use the wireless network function of this projector the designated USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required Do not use any extension cable or device when connecting the adapter to the projector e The projector does not allow both wireless and wired LAN to be connected to th
68. lt U m AUDIO IN 3E DF AUDIO IN2 CE DF 01 00 ARSE Set _ AUDIO N3 5E DE o B BE EF o3 o6 00 oE D2 oF 00 OFF AE DE Ge 90 DE 02 00 AUDIO IN 2A DC AUDIO IN2 DA DC o1 00 Set AUDIO IN3 4A DD AUDIO HDMI 7A C4 01 00 OFF BA DD Get 89 DD 02 00 AUDIO IN C2 DE AUDIO IN2 32 DE 01 00 Set _ AUDIO IN3 A2 DF AUDIO HDMI 2 02 C7 OFF 52 DF Get 2 00 AUDIO IN A2 DC AUDIO AUDIO IN2 52 DC SOURCE AUDIO N3 C2 DD COMPONENT OFF 32 DD Gei 01 DD 02 00 gt Z z O n Ww lt D m 61 D 0 ep 5E DD AE DD 3E DC CE DC FD DC 4A DE BA DE 2A DF 8A D3 DA DF E9 DF E6 DC 16 DC 86 DD B6 DO 76 DD 45 DD 3E DF CE DF 5E DE 0E D2 AE DE 9D DE 2A DC DA DC 4A DD 7A CA BA DD 89 DD C2 DE 32 DE A2 DF 02 C7 52 DF A2 DC 52 DC C2 DD _32 DD 01 DD continued on next page 31 CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC Seeker Header one Action Type eating cede AUDIO IN1 AUDIO IN2 AUDIO IN3 FF G AUDIO IN1 F F AUDIO IN2 AUDIO IN3 G 00 00 AUDIO IN1 01 00 AUDIO et AUDIO N2 02 00 eas AUDIO IN3 03 00 Per Ta 00 00 Ge 00 00 Disable 01 00 00 00 R ORA Enable 01 00 es Get 02 00 00 00 USBTYPEA oa 00 00 SOUND 01 00 01 00 ENABLE 00 00 USB TYPE B 01 00 00 00 SOUND 01 00 ENABLE 02 00 00 00 01 00 6 N N D 2 O et OF et O F t
69. mask 255 255 255 0 Network address 192 168 10 in this case Select from 1 to 254 for xxx not duplicating with any other equipments In this case since the IP address of the projector is 192 168 10 254 specify a setting between 1 to 253 for the computer NOTE 0 0 0 0 cannot be set to the IP address e The projector s IP address can be changed by using the configuration utility via a web browser L420 e If the projector and the computer exist in the same network i e same network address you can leave the default gateway field blank e When the projector and the computer exist in different networks the default gateway must be set continued on next page 1 4 Manual network connection setting Wireless LAN continued 5 Right click Wireless Network Connection to open oe the menu and select Connect Disconnect E A e 6 From the connectable wireless networks select the SSID of the 9 a projector set to wireless by default and click Connect If i P you have enabled encryption a window asking for input of the ia encryption key will be displayed Input the preset key 7 After connection is established Connected will appear to the Preece right of SSID ae 14 Ze NGOKO AMENO The projector can display or play back the computer screen images and audio data that are transmitted through the network This Network Presentation feature helps you
70. optional lens ask your dealer LENS LOCK Using the A V buttons turns on off the lens lock feature When ON is selected the buttons ZOOM ZOOM FOCUS LENS SHIFT LENS MEMORY are locked ON OFF continued on next page 70 ltem scription KEY LOCK 1 Use the A buttons to choose the operations control CONTROL PANEL REMOTE CONTROL 2 Use the lt gt buttons to select ON or OFF ON amp OFF Selecting ON in Step 2 locks the buttons except STANDBY ON and STANDBY ON on the operations control selected in Step 1 Selecting OFF releases the locked buttons on the operations control selected in Step 1 e Please use this function to prevent tampering or accidental operation e It s not possible to disable both options at the same time REMOTE RECEIV 1 Select a remote sensor using the A V button FRONT amp REAR 2 Switch it using the lt gt button ON amp OFF SERVICE e When one sensor is turned off the other cannot be turned off too continued REMOTE FREQ 1 Use the A button to change the projector s remote sensor frequency setting 44 18 1 NORMAL 2 HIGH 2 Use the lt gt button to change the projector s remote sensor on or off ON amp OFF The factory default setting is for both 1 NORMAL and 2 HIGH to be on If the remote control does not function correctly disable either of them e It s not possible to disable both options at the same time REMOTE
71. or attach the lens cap to prevent the lens surface being scratched when the projector is not used e Do not touch the lens to prevent fog or dirt of the lens that cause deterioration of display quality e Use commercially available lens tissue to clean the lens used to clean cameras eyeglasses etc Be careful not to scratch the lens with hard objects Take care of the cabinet and the remote control Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration peeling paint etc e Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet and control panel of the projector and the remote control When excessively soiled dilute a neutral detergent in water wet and wring out the soft cloth and afterward wipe with a dry soft cloth Do not use undiluted detergent directly e Do not use an aerosol sprays solvents volatile substances or abrasive cleaner e Before using chemical wipes be sure to read and observe the instructions e Do not allow long term close contact with rubber or vinyl About bright spots or dark spots Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen this is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays and such do not constitute or imply a machine defect Be careful of printing of the LCD panel If the projector continues projecting a still image inactive images or 16 9 aspect images in case of 4 3 panel etc for long time the LCD panel might possibly be printed NOTE About consumables Lamp LCD panels
72. performed when a certain r POSITION Y input port is selected or when a certain input signal is button e displayed U OO ope 2D OOE 9 eOoo0e f e When you want to reset the operation press RESET button on the remote control during the operation Note that some items ex LANGUAGE VOLUME cannot be reset e In the ADVANCED MENU when you want to return to the previous display press the lt cursor button or ESC button on the remote control Indication in OSD On Screen Display BRIGHTNESS E E RETURN 2 FILTER TIME T TEHPORAAY COMDITION ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO LOAD wre The meanings of the general words on the OSD are as follows am pressing the MENU button RETURN Selecting this word returns the menu to the previous menu CANCEL or NO Selecting this word cancels the operation in the present menu and returns to the previous menu OK or YES Selecting this word executes the prepared function or shifts the menu to the next menu 40 Using the menu function continued Containing items of each menu The items contained in the menus are as below ASPECT AUTO KEYSTONE 4 KEYSTONE E KEYSTONE EASY MENU 242 PERFECT FIT PICTURE MODE ECO MODE INSTALLATION RESET FILTER TIME LANGUAGE ADVANCED MENU EXIT BRIGHTNESS CONTRAST GAMMA COLOR TEMP COLOR BCTERE E TINT SHARPNESS ACTIVE IRIS MY MEMORY ASPECT OVER SCAN V POSITION H POSITION H PHASE bi EA H S
73. place Placing the projector in a smoke a highly humid dusty place oily soot or corrosive gas could result in fire or electrical shock e Do not place the projector near a smoky humid or dusty place ex a smoking space a kitchen a beach etc Do not place the projector outdoors e Do not use a humidifier near the projector Take care of the air filter to normal ventilate The air filter should be cleaned periodically If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like internal temperature rises and could cause malfunction The projector may display the message such as CHECK THE AIR FLOW or turn off the projector to prevent the internal heat level rising e When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter clean the air filter as soon as possible e If the soiling will not come off the air filter or it becomes damaged replace the air filter e Use the air filter of the specified type only Please order the air filter specified in the other manual of this projector to your dealer e When you replace the lamp replace also the air filter The air filter may be attached when you buy a replacement lamp for this projector e Do not turn on the projector without air filter Avoid a high temperature environment The heat could have adverse influence on the cabinet of the projector and other parts Do not place the projector the remote control and other parts in direct sunlight or near a hot object such
74. polarizors and other optical components and air filter and cooling fans have a different lifetime in each These parts may need to be replaced after a long usage time e This product isn t designed for continuous use of long time In the case of continuous use for 6 hours or more or use for 6 hours or more every day even if it isn t continuous or repetitious use the lifetime may be shortened and these parts may need to be replaced even if one year has not passed since the beginning of using e Any inclining use beyond the adjustment range explained in these user s manuals may shorten the lifetimes of the consumables Before turning on the power make the projector cool down adequately After turning the projector off pushing the restart switch or interrupting of the power supply make the projector cool down adequately Operation in a high temperature state of the projector causes a damage of the electrode and un lighting of the lamp Avoid strong rays Any strong ray such as direct rays of the sun or room lighting onto the remote control sensors could invalidate the remote control Avoid radio interference Any interfering radiation could cause disordered image or noises e Avoid radio generator such as a mobile telephone transceiver etc around the projector About displaying characteristic The display condition of the projector such as color contrast etc depends on characteristic of the screen because the proj
75. port to the computer s LAN port with a LAN cable or insert the USB wireless adapter into one of the USB TYPE A ports 2 Connect the projector s CONTROL port and the device s RS 232C port with an RS 232C cable for RS 232C communication NOTE Before connecting the devices read the manuals for the devices to ensure the connection For RS 232C connection check the specifications of each port and use the suitable cable Connection to the ports in the Operating Guide Technical 52 6 2 Communication setup To configure the setup of the communication using NETWORK BRIDGE for the projector use items in the COMMUNICATION menu Open the menu of the projector and select the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu LQOPTION menu gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide 1 In the COMMUNICATION TYPE menu select NETWORK BRIDGE WIRELESS or WIRED depending on the type of connection you use for the CONTROL port 2 Using the SERIAL SETTINGS menu select the proper baud rate and parity for the CONTROL port according to the specification of the RS 232C port of the connected device item Condition BAUD RATE 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps PARITY NONE ODD EVEN Data length 8 bit fixed Start bit 1 bit fixed Stop bit 1 bit fixed 3 Using the TRANSMISSION METHOD menu set up the proper method for the CONTROL port according to your use NOTE The OFF is selected for the COMMUNICATION TY
76. power is turned off or set the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL e The adjustable range of LENS SHIFT varies depending on the lens unit mounted on the projector to maintain picture quality Therefore LENS SHIFT adjustment may not reach the end of the indicator in the dialog and that is not a failure Adjusting the lens continued Lens memory This projector is equipped with memory functions for the lens adjustments LENS SHIFT and LENS TYPE Up a nur to 3 sets of adjustments can be stored O exc O mt To utilize the lens memory feature press the POSITION alk or FUNCTION button while the LENS SHIFT dialog is displayed Then the LENS MEMORY dialog will ap pear The current lens adjustments are displayed on the CURRENT line The adjustments already stored in the lens memory are displayed on the lines of SAVE and LOAD 1 to 3 O SAVE To store the current lens adjustments select one of the SAVE options numbered 1 to 3 number of the lens memory and press the or ENTER button Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be lost by saving new data into the memory O LOAD To recall stored adjustments select one of the LOAD options numbered 1 to 3 number of the lens memory and press the gt or ENTER button Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by loading data If you want to keep the current adjustment please save it before performing a LOAD function O CLEAR LENS MEMORY
77. rotate the elevator feet of Set B to adjust the angle such that the tilt is just about right 2 Reset the adjustment of KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT on Set B ELQOperating Guide EASY MENU or SETUP menu NOTE KEYSTONE cannot be operated when PERFECT FIT is in use To reset both functions reset PERFECT FIT first e Perform the INSTALLATION setting first if necessary as it may change the image position EQOperating Guide SETUP menu continued on next page Installation 2 3 Installing the second projector Set B Setting up Set B continued 3 Adjust the image size and position of Set B with the ZOOM FOCUS and LENS SHIFT features such that the image can be superimposed well to the image of Set A EQOperating Guide Adjusting the lens NOTE Fine adjustment of the image size and position thereafter with functions such as KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT does not increase the image size It is therefore important to have the image of Set B completely overlapping the image of Set A e When controlling Set B with the remote control Set A may also respond to the remote control It is recommended to control Set B with the control panel on Set B e If you are using Simple Stack go to For Simple Stack users E72 4 Display the menu with the MENU button Operating Guide Using the menu function 5 Use the A lt P buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION STACK
78. scription RESOLUTION The resolution for the COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 input signals can be set on this projector 1 In the INPUT menu select the RESOLUTION using the A V buttons and press the button The RESOLUTION menu will be n displayed nf STANDARD 1024 x T68 2 In the RESOLUTION menu select the we STANDARD 1280x 768 resolution you wish to display using N i o the A V buttons STANDARD 1366 x 768 Selecting AUTO will set a resolution aasre nae appropriate to the input signal 3 Pressing the gt or ENTER button when selecting a STANDARD resolution will automatically adjust the horizontal and vertical positions clock phase and horizontal size a RE The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog will be ree x TEA BBOHZ displayed 4 To set a custom resolution use the A V buttons to select the CUSTOM and the RESOLUTION_CUSTOM box will be displayed CUSTOM it RESOLUTION STANDARD Set the horizontal HORZ and vertical VERT resolutions using Mi RESOLUTION _CUSTOM the A W lt gt buttons HORT This function may not support all SOANE ees resolutions 5 Move the cursor to OK on screen and press the or ENTER button The message ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO CHANGE RESOLUTION appears To save the setting press the gt button The horizontal and vertical positions clock phase and horizontal size will be automatically adjusted E EEH The INPUT_INFORMATION dialog AN will be displayed 6 To revert
79. select the SLIDESHOW button in the Thumbnail menu and press the ENTER button on the remote control INPUT button on the control panel or click ENTER on the Web Remote Control Operating by buttons While the Slideshow is displayed the following button operations are enabled when still images are displayed and the same button operations in the Full Screen mode are enabled when movies are displayed Button operation Functions Remote Control panel Web Remote control Control ENTER INPUT ENTER Displays Thumbnail NOTE These operations are not accessible while the projector OSD is displayed e It is not possible to change the input port by using the INPUT button when the Thumbnail screen Slideshow or Full Screen image is displayed e When the Slideshow mode is set to ONE TIME and the last file is a still image the last slide of the presentation will remain displayed until the ENTER button on the remote control or Web Remote Control or the INPUT button on the control panel is pressed 101 PC LESS Presentation continued Operating by SLIDESHOW in the Thumbnail menu You can play the Slideshow at your desired configuration Configure the SLIDESHOW item in the Thumbnail menu 197 ig ONE TIME Sets the interval time for displaying still images during the Slideshow It is not recommend to set the interval time very short something INTERVAL like several seconds because it may take more than s
80. sen sis ll n j ljent minen siirto tai k ytt ei ole sallittua ilmannimenomaista kirjallista valtuutusta UWAGA Informacje podane w tym podr czniku mog ulec zmianie bez uprzedzenia Producent nie ponosi odpowiedzialno ci za ewentualne b dy w podr czniku Powielanie przesy anie lub inne wykorzystanie tego dokumentu lub jego tre ci nie jest dozwolone bez wyra nej pisemnej zgody HITACHI Inspire the Next Hitachi America Ltd Business Solutions Group 900 Hitachi way Chula Vista CA 91914 3556 USA CANADA Tel 1 800 448 2244 gt htto www hitachi america us projectors Hitachi Europe Ltd Digital Media Group Consumer Affairs Department Whitebrook Park Lower Cookham Road Maidenhead Berkshire SL6 8YA UNITED KINGDOM Tel 0844 481 0297 Email consumer mail hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe S A S Digital Media Group 31 bis rue du 35 me Regiment de l aviation ZAC DU CHENE 69500 BRON FRANCE Tel 043 742 8430 Email france consommateur hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe GmbH Am Seestern 18 40547 Dusseldorf GERMANY Tel 0211 5283 801 Email Service germany hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe S A 364 Kifissias Ave amp 1 Delfon Str 152 33 Chalandri Athens GREECE Tel 210 6837200 Email tech assist hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe S r l Via T Gulli 39 20147 MILANO ITALY Tel 39 02 487861 Email customerservice italy hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe S A Gran Via Carles III 86 P
81. signal the range of this adjustment depends on OVER SCAN in IMAGE menu 448 setting It is not possible to adjust when OVER SCAN is set to 10 e If POSITION button is pressed when a menu is indicated on screen the displayed picture does not move its position but the menu does e This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A B or HDMI 1 2 port Correcting the distortion To correct the distortion of projected screen you can select one of three options AUTO MANUAL and PERFECT FIT First press the KEYSTONE button to display the KEYSTONE menu and point at one of items with the A V buttons AUTO performs the automatic vertical keystone sy KEYSTONE N button correction L54 MANUAL allows you to adjust the vertical and horizontal poi a gl Bg AS keystone KEYSTONE PERFECT FIT allows you to adjust each of the screen 2 MANUAL corners and sides to correct the e PERFECT FIT distortion EXT Then follow the procedure shown below for the item you selected NOTE The menu or dialog will automatically disappear after several seconds of inactivity Press the KEYSTONE button again or point the cursor at EXIT in the dialog and press the or ENTER button to end the operation and close the menu or dialog e When the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT neither AUTO nor MANUAL is selectable If you wish to use these functions refer to step 3 in the PERFECT FIT item to ini
82. the projector from the power outlet if the projector is not used for the time being gt Do not connect the projector to a power supply while no lens unit is attached to it gt Do not open or remove any portion of the product unless the manuals direct it For internal maintenance leave it to your dealer or their service personnel gt Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the manufacturer gt Do not modify the projector or accessories gt Do not let any things or any liquids enter to the inside of the product gt Do not wet the product gt Do not place the projector where any oils such as cooking or machine oil are used Oil may harm the product resulting in malfunction or falling from the mounted position gt Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product Do not place the product on an unstable place such as the uneven surface or the leaned table Do not place the product unstably Place the projector so that it does not protrude from the surface where the projector is placed on Place your hands on the grip on the bottom of the projector when carrying the projector Remove all the attachments including the power cord and cables from the projector when carrying the projector gt Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector while the lamp is on gt Do not approach the lamp cover and the exhaust vents while the projection lamp is on Also after the lamp goes out do not
83. the step 1 anman S Ro S e lt Only for CP X8150 CP X8160 CP warms o WX8240 CP WX8255 and CP SX8350 gt araor You cannot select COMPUTER IN1 in mH step 1 and COMPUTER IN2 in step 2 and vice versa lt CP WU8440 CP WU8450 gt 56 NU KO MENU From the AUDIO menu items shown in the table below can be performed Select an item using the A cursor buttons and press the cursor button or the ENTER jeno button to execute the item Then perform it according to esm the following table a CEAN Woe Tes eth COMPUTER IN 1024 x TES BEUH VOLUME Using the lt i gt buttons adjusts the volume Low High Using the A V buttons turns on off the built in speaker ON amp OFF When OFF is selected the built in soeaker does not work While the image signal from the input port chosen in step 1 is projected the audio signal from the input port selected in step 2 is output to both the AUDIO OUT port and built in speaker of this projector However the built in soeaker does not work when SPEAKER is set to OFF 1 Choose a picture input port using the A V buttons Choose AUDIO OUT STANDBY to select the sound output in the standby mode 2 Select an audio input port or the mute icon using the lt gt buttons The icons indicate the following No 1 AUDIO IN1 port No 2 AUDIO IN2 port No 3 AUDIO IN3 ports No 4 LAN port No 5 USB TYPE A ports No 6 USB TYPE B port No 7 HDMI
84. through this manual before using this product in order to use safely and utilize well the product AAWARNING P Before using this product be sure to read all manuals for this product After reading them store them in a safe place for future reference gt Heed all the warnings and cautions in the manuals or on the product gt Follow all the instructions in the manuals or on the product NOTE In this manual unless any comments are accompanied the 7 manuals means all the documents provided with this product and the product means this projector and all the accessories came with the projector Contents MA MA ISL OF all cecsoeieanscasinetcasetdanecuenetedbacdewsee 2 Connecting power supply 8 Entries and graphical symbols explanation 2 Turning on the powet s0sc00 9 Important safety instruction eee 2 Adjusting the projector s elevator 10 Regulatory notices cccccsseeeeeees 3 Adjusting the lens position 10 About Electro Magnetic Interference 3 Displaying the picture 0 11 About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment 4 Turning off the powet 008 12 Contents of packag cccceeceeees 4 Replacing the lamp cc000 13 Preparing for the remote control 5 Cleaning and replacing the air filter 15 AIrangemMent ccccecesssseseseeeneeeens 6 U
85. to cause radio wave interference e Available Channels The USB wireless adapter uses the 2 4GHz radio frequency band but depending on the country or region you are in the channels that you can use might be limited Please consult your dealer for information on the usable channels e Bringing the optional USB wireless adapter out of the country or region you reside in and using it there could lead to a violation of the radio laws of that country or region 1 Connection to the network 1 1 System requirements 1 1 1 Required equipment preparation The following equipments are required to connect the projector to your computer through the network Common The projector 1 unit Computer minimum 1 set m Depending on how you want to connect 1 For the wired connection 1 LAN cable CAT 5 or greater 1 piece 2 For the wireless connection 2 Projector side IEEE802 11b g n USB wireless adapter option USB WL 11N 1 unit Computer side IEEE802 11 b g n wireless LAN equipment 1 unit for each 3 1 The system for using the network function of the projector requires communication environment conforming 100Base TX or 10Base T 2 An access point is required when the wireless LAN connection is used as Infrastructure mode 3 Depending on the type of wireless network device and computer you are using the projector may not be able to communicate properly with your computer even if the computer is equipped with a built in wireless
86. will be sent back in the event of authentication failure when authentication is enabled lt Reply in the event of an authentication error gt Reply Error code Ox1F 0x04 0x00 e TCP 9715 Send Data format The following formatting is added to the header 0 x 02 Data length 0 x 0D Checksum 1 byte and Connection ID 1 byte of the RS 232C commands Header Data length RS 232Ccommand Check Sum Connection 0x02 0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Header 0x02 Fixed Data length RS 232C commands byte length 0x0D Fixed RS 232C command RS 232C commands that start with OxBE OxEF 13 bytes Check Sum This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum Connection ID Random value from 0 to 255 This value is attached to the reply data 64 7 4 Command Control via the Network continued Reply Data format The connection ID the data is same as the connection ID data on the sending data format is attached to the RS 232C commands reply data lt ACK reply gt Connection ID 1 byte lt NAK reply gt Connection ID 1 byte lt Error reply gt Error code a ail 2 bytes 1 byte lt Data reply gt Connection ID 1 byte lt Projector busy reply gt Status code a 2 bytes 1 byte lt Authentication error reply gt Authentication Connection Error code ID 1
87. without notice Please check our website where you may find the latest information for this projector 420 e No responsibility is taken for any obstacle and defect to hardware and software of your computer as a result of the use of the CD ROM e All or Any part of the information in the CD ROM must not be copied reproduced or republished without notice to our company Specifications _ item Specification Liquid crystal projector CP X8150 CP X8160 786 432 pixels 1024 horizontal x 768 vertical CP WX8240 CP WX8255 Liquid Crystal 1 024 000 pixels 1280 horizontal x 800 vertical Panel CP SX8350 1 470 000 pixels 1400 horizontal x 1050 vertical CP WU8440 CP WU8450 2 304 000 pixels 1920 horizontal x 1200 vertical Lam CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP WU8440 245W UHP i CP X8160 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8450 330W UHP 8 W x2 CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP WU8440 Power supply AC100 120 V 3 8 A AC220 240 V 1 9 A Rated current CP X8160 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8450 AC100 120 V 4 9 A AC220 240 V 2 4 A CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP WU8440 Power AC100 120 V 375 W AC220 240 V 355 W consumption CP X8160 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8450 AC100 120 V 480 W AC220 240 V 455 W CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 0 40 C Operating CP X8160 CP WX8255 CP WU8450 0 45 C Operating When the projector is used at high altitudes even with the CP X8160 CP WX8255 or CP WU8450 the service life of the optical compo
88. 0 20 70 00 00 Disable 00 00 PERFECT FIT Enable ae sie a ao aa 2n ae 2n a S orom Peay ee Bite air kaye 2 ono EE aa A PERFECT FIT Execute BE EF 03 06 00 D5 8A 06 00 29 21 o0 00 All Corners Reset continued on next page 27 CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC ee Header oe Action Type eating cede PERFECT FIT Left Side Distortion PERFECT FIT Right Side Distortion PERFECT FIT Distortion Position V PERFECT FIT Top Side Distortion PERFECT FIT Bottom Side Distortion PERFECT FIT Distortion Position H PERFECT FIT D 47 21 All Sides Reset Bewe e er os o o 90 98 06 00 a7 21 ooo PERFECT FIT Execute BE EF 03 06 00 29 95 06 00 48 21 00 00 Memory Save 1 PERFECT FIT Execute BE EF 03 06 00 D5 94 06 00 49 21 00 00 Memory Save 2 PERFECT FIT Execute BE EF 03 06 00 91 94 06 00 44 21 00 00 Memory Save 3 PERFECT FIT Execute BE EF 03 06 00 6D 95 06 00 4B 21 00 00 Memory Load 1 PERFECT FIT Execute BE EF 06 00 19 94 06 00 4c 21 00 00 Memory Load 2 PERFECT FIT Execute BE EF 06 00 E5 95 06 00 4D 21 00 00 Memory Load 3 OFF aoe q y eeehe ere pe aa MODE ce BE EF 03 06 00 ce 27 02 00 1033 0000 ECO MODE ae a ee INSTALLATION c BeF 03 06 00 4 D2 0200 01 30 0000 Only for CP X8150 CP X8160 CP WX8240 and CP WX8255 28 continued on next page CommandData Da
89. 00 Still 768 x 576 Movie CP SX8350 1400 x 1050 Still 768 x 576 Movie CP WU8440 CP WU8450 1920 x 1200 Still 768 x 576 Movie Some computers may not support above resolutions e Files with a resolution smaller than 36 x 36 are not supported e Files with a resolution smaller than 100 x 100 may not be displayed e Movie images with a frame rate higher than 15 fps cannot be displayed e Movie images with a bit rate higher than 20 Mbps cannot be displayed e Some supported files may not be displayed e Only a frame appears when the content of image data cannot be displayed in the Thumbnail mode e Even with the file format and audio format combinations described above playback of some files may fail Thumbnail Mode The Thumbnail mode displays the images stored in USB storage devices on the Thumbnail screen Maximum 20 images are displayed in a screen If you wish you can jump into the Full Screen mode or Slideshow mode after you select some images in the Thumbnail mode The Thumbnail mode will be started as the primary function of the PC LESS Presentation after selecting the USB TYPE A as the input source E E al 4 Selected image ia O en E Thumbnail menu Thumbnail images 95 PC LESS Presentation continued Operating by buttons You can control the images on the Thumbnail screen with the remote control control panel or Web Remote Control The following functions can be supported while the Th
90. 0Hz 1600x1200 1 2 1 9 99 04 3 46 1200 1 UXGA 6OHz W UXGA 60Hz 1920 x 1200 0 208 0 519 12 47 0 312 6 26 1200 Reduced Blanking COMC WO wars DAS USB TYPE A ooo ogo r S VIDEO VIDEO E aas COMPUTER IN 2 GN BICb Pb R Cr Pr CONTROL iBIGUE UT lt a CONTROL oS COMPUTER IN1 MONITOR OUT D sub 15pin mini shrink jack lt Computer signal gt e Video signal RGB separate Analog 0 7Vp p 75Q terminated positive e H V sync signal TTL level positive negative e Composite sync signal TTL level lt Component video signal gt e Video signal Y with composite sync Analog 1 0 0 1Vp p 75Q terminated Cb Pb Analog 0 7 0 1Vp p 75Q terminated Cr Pr Analog 0 7 0 1Vp p 750 terminated e System 480i 60 480p 60 576i 50 720p 50 60 1080i 50 60 1 Video Red crer 9 Noconnecton 6 Ground Red Ground CrPr ra vse OOOO 8 Ground Blue Ground CbiPb J USBTYPEA f DC5V 1 ae lo O poog USB HDMI HDMI TYPEB 1 2 S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIOIN3 R 0 CONTROL Cr Pr Cb Pb Y COMPONENT am O exe eae a D REMOTE CONTROL COMPUTER IN 2 GN B Cb Pb R Cr Pr v COMPUTER IN2 G Y B Cb Pb R Cr Pr H V BNC ja
91. 1 port No 8 HDMI 2 port X mutes the sound AUDIO SOURCE e Audio input from port nos 4 to 8 can only be selected by each of the picture input ports e C C Closed Caption is automatically activated when X is selected and an input signal containing C C is received This function is available only when the signal is NTSC for VIDEO or S VIDEO or 480i 60 for COMPONENT COMPUTER IN1 or COMPUTER IN2 and when AUTO is selected for DISPLAY in the C C menu under the SCREEN menu 64 continued on next page of ltem Description OOO OOOO _CSOS The mode of HDMI audio from the HDMI 1 and 2 ports can be set 1 Use the A F buttons to select the HDMI port to be set HDMI AUDIO 2 Use the lt gt buttons to select the mode of HDMI audio Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one for your HDMI audio device 58 SON a IN MANU From the SCREEN menu items shown in the table below can be performed a ce MEN POSTION Select an item using the A V cursor buttons and press the cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item Then perform it according to the following table Item Description LANGUAGE MENU POSITION BLANK START UP Using the A lt b buttons switches the OSD On Screen Display language ENGLISH amp FRANCAIS amp DEUTSCH amp ESPANOL shown in the LANGUAGE dialog Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the language setting Using the
92. 122 48 0 0 4 8 1 0 27 106 5 218 137 54 0 of 20 1 1 3 0 120 242 152 eof of 0 22 1 21 3 4 133 0 0 33 191 5 1 199 132 73 29 159 87 _ 34 185 102 40 4 211 116 46 17 6 0 238 131 51 19 6 7 afus olat a 10 12 15 244 12 3 305 15 4 366 18 4 609 30 7 6 2 17 9 3 15 5 484 305120 of of 44 25 67 266 13 4 527 201 114 42 16 605 381 150 0l of 55 3 1 84 332 167 659 363 143 52 20 725 457 180 O oJ 6 6 3 7 10 1 398 20 1 790 436 172 62 25 1209 762 300 ol of11 1 6 2 16 9 66433 41317 B x V Screen size Projection distance from the front of the projector unit Screen height _ Projector top Projectar bacon O CP WX8240 with SL 702 1280 x 800 10 Projection Screen height eGo Polen Screen height distance size distance rmin a max E a max inch m inch cm os cm oF inch m inch cm on cm am att oaoa 1o 39 15 af a alal aloe 08 ul a 7 17 KE mi o8 2 0 CECEN v5 sal 22 or lol os oa Sof 77 10 08 OEA 28 osl 115 401 40 20 8 1 2 o9 22 87 3 3 134 114 45 135 118 46 24 9 14 1 1 26 101 3 9 152 133 53 154 135 _53 27 11 16 12 2 9 115 4 4 174 152 60 115 4 4 173 151 60 30 12 1 8 1 4 3 3 130 5 0 195 171 68 127 4 9 192 168 66 34 13 2 0 1 5 3 7 144 5 5 217 191 75 191
93. 168 1 354 SUBNET MASH 255 755 255 0 DEF AULT GATEWAY o o20 0 DHS SERVER Dano MAC ADDRESS FF FF FF FF FF FF TIME DIFFERENCE GMT ORDO WI RED DATE AND TIME 2000 11 000 INFORMATION RETURN EXIT e For details of PASSCODE refer to the manual for LiveViewer e Only the first 16 characters of the PROJECTOR NAME are displayed e IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY indicate 0 0 0 0 when DHCP is ON and the projector has not gotten address from DHCP server continued on next page 82 ltem scription 1 Use the A buttons on the NETWORK menu to select the PROJECTOR NAME and press the gt button The PROJECTOR NAME dialog will be displayed 2 The current PROJECTOR NAME will be TET on the first 3 lines Particular projector name is pre assigned by default Use the A 4 gt buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time press the RESET button or press the lt and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and push the ENTER or INPUT button 1 character or all characters will be erased The PROJECTOR NAME can be input up to 64 PROJECTOR characters z NAME 3 To change an already inserted character press the A V button to move the cursor to one of the first 3 lines and use the lt P gt buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed After pressing the ENTER or INP
94. 2 0 1 5 3 6 143 7 2 285 169 67 190 9 6 377 224 88 22 9 3 0 23 5 5 zeloa 254 Tod a 253 12 8 503 299 118 30 12 4 1 3 0 7 3 286 14 5 569 339 133 34 13 316 16 0 628 374 147 37 145 5 1 3 8 9 1 358 18 1 711 423 167 42 171 379 19 1 754 449 177 45 18 6 1 4 6 10 9 429 21 7 853 508 200 51 20 632 31 91256 748 294 75 29 10 2 7 6 18 2 715 36 1 1422 1 9 2 6 3 2 3 8 4 5 A 401 0 9 0 5 or 1 4 07 18 60 13 os 19 7 70 15 0 9 23 89 101 9 114 3 2 127 4 8 6 4 8 0 9 6 500 10 8 6 7 16 1 Computer AUDIO OUT RGB OUT USB TYPE A DC5V 0 5A Oooo ood gt USBTYPEB HDMI1 HDMI 2 S VIDEO VIDEO AudIOIN3 i D Be O Cb Pb COMPONENT GN uT REMOTE CONTROL Computer External device Access j f OW a point e c USB a wireless l a ada pte r i ee O tional USB TYPE A ee a Bot TEF ry C j TEF 4 a a COMPUTER IN 2 GN B Cb Pb R Cr Pr USBTYPEB HDMI HDMI 2 S VIDEO SEO AUuDIOIN3 USB 60 eO AUDIO IN 1 COMPUTER IN 1 F Y t CONTROL ChiPb COMPONENT device e o ERA 0 0 0 6 4 AUDIO OUT ow
95. 4 SC d BE EF 03 06 00 02 D6 01 00 1520 0300 m ASPECT OVER SCAN ee sat Pee BE EF o 06 00 EC D9 06 00 27 70 00 00 V POSITION V Reset ee BE EF o o6 00 Eo D2 o6 00 02 70 00 00 H POSITION H ma BE EF o6 00 1c D3 06 00 03 70 00 00 Supported except for CP X8150 and CP X8160 24 continued on next page Names CommandData Data ration T Header CRC H PHASE H SIZE Set pena Set ee ar Set Oo es COMPONENT E6 70 86 74 16 75 S VIDEO Set 16 70 FORMAT 26 77 86 71 PAL BE EF 03 06 00 52 75 01 00 11 22 05 00 C VIDEO set FORMAT BE EF continued on next page 25 CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC ee Header one Action Type eating cede HDMI 1 FORMAT Get Set Rael San HDMI 2 RANGE HDMI 2 FORMAT COMPUTER IN COMPUTER IN2 11 20 eer eee 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 00 01 00 02 00 BE EF 03 06 00 0B C3 01 00 54 30 0000 01 00 02 00 SEIS Me alias 01 00 Get 02 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 26 continued on next page Command Data ac Command Data AUTO KEYSTONE V Execute BE EF 06 00 E5 D1 06 00 OD 20 00 00 EXECUTE 03 Get BE EF 07 20 00 00 KEYSTONE V Increment 00 00 03 Decrement 00 00 KEYSTONE V Execute 06 00 08 DO 06 00 oc 70 o0 00 Reset G 00 00 KEYSTONE H Increment 00 00 Decrement 00 00 Execute 03 06 00 98 D8 06 0
96. 4 Click the Apply button to save the settings ee iF ey sana O O mia jeri e i rn ese et a muie Sage a der eer liege hi dori Pee ee beiee Pee ees NOTE The internal clock s time may not remain accurate Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time L431 e Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode SETUP menu in the Operating Guide or the AC power the current date and time setting is reset 61 7 4 Command Control via the Network You can configure and control the projector via the network using RS 232C commands Communication Port The following two ports are assigned for the command control TCP 23 Network Control Port1 Port 23 TCP 9715 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 NOTE Command control is available only via the specified port above Command Control Settings 222 Configure the following items from a web browser when command control is used Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser and select Projector Web Control from the selection window 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Port Settings on the main menu 4 Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port1 Port 23 to use TCP 23 Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required othe
97. 50 60 1080p 50 60 Audio signal Format Linear PCM Sampling frequency 48kHz 44 1kHz 32kHz This projector can be connected with another equipment that has HDMI connector but with some equipment the projector may not work properly something like no video Be sure to use an HDMI cable that has the HDMI logo Use a Category 2 certified HDMI cable to input 1080p 50 60 signal to the projector When the projector is connected with a device having DVI connector use a DVI to HDMI cable to connect with the HDMI input e The HDMI cables might come off easily due to the lack of a mechanical lock on the cables and connectors It is recommended to fasten the cables to the projector to prevent the cables from coming off 1114 continued on next page Connecting with your devices continued Speakers with an amplifier L R Another rojector proj A USB TYPE A s G aon Wired Remote control 5 5 M N2 D GY B Cb Pb R Cr Pr O OO Vv NN z REMOTE CONTROL NOTE To use a wired remote control connect a wired remote control to the REMOTE CONROL IN port You can also connect another projector to the REMOTE CONROL OUT port to control it from the wired remote control You can utilize this projector as a remote control relay with the REMOTE C
98. A V buttons E and press the gt button SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION STACK 7 After pressing the gt button a dialog to Bele confirm whether or not to save the setting is YOU WISH TO CHANGE STACK SETTING displayed eae Press the button to complete the setting M 79 8 If you are using Intellectual Stack disable the remote control receiving using KEY LOCK MboOperating Guide OPTION menu NOTE Set A will not be operated by the remote control hereafter To avoid crosstalk when operating with the remote control it is recommended to disable the remote control receiving using KEY LOCK e After the STACK MODE setting is completed Set A Sub will not be able to receive the remote control signals When STACK MODE is set to OFF enable the remote control receiving using KEY LOCK if necessary Installation 2 3 Installing the second projector Set B Deciding installation position Decide the position of Set B and its projection angle MUser s Manual concise Arrangement and Adjusting the projector s elevator NOTE Set the tilt angle of Set B to within 9 degrees from the level line Connecting projectors To use Intellectual Stack connect an RS 232C cross cable between the CONTROL port of Set A and Set B Setting up Set B 1 Turn on Set B NOTE After turning on Set B make sure the image of Set B is not significantly tilted compared to the image of Set A If the image is overly tilted
99. AVE Saves the MyMemory data MYMEMORY RECALL Recalls the MyMemory data IMAGE ASPECT Selects the aspect setting OVER SCAN Adjusts the over scan setting V POSITION Adjusts the vertical position H POSITION Adjusts the horizontal position H PHASE Adjusts the horizontal phase H SIZE Adjusts the horizontal size AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE Performs the automatic adjustment INPUT PROGRESSIVE Selects the progressive setting VIDEO NR Selects the video noise reduction setting COLOR SPACE Selects the color space COMPONENT Selects the COMPONENT port setting VIDEO FORMAT l S VIDEO Selects the s video format setting VIDEO FORMAT VIDEO Selects the video format setting HDMI FORMAT HDMI 1 HDMI FORMAT HDMI 2 HDMI RANGE HDMI 1 HDMI RANGE HDMI 2 continued on next page Selects the HDMI format setting of the HDMI 1 port Selects the HDMI format setting of the HDMI 2 port Selects the HDMI range setting of the HDMI 1 port Selects the HDMI range setting of the HDMI 2 port 34 3 1 Projector Web Control Projector Control continued Item Description INPUT continued COMPUTER IN COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN COMPUTER IN2 FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN1 FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN2 Selects the COMPUTER IN1 input signal type Selects the COMPUTER IN2 input signal type Turns the FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN1 funct
100. AVING function is working Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu The internal clock has been reset Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode or the AC power the current date and time setting is reset Check the DATE AND TIME setting for WIRELESS SETUP or WIRED SETUP in the NETWORK menu Disconnect the LAN cable and check that the projector is working properly If this phenomenon occurs after connecting to the network there may be a loop between two Ethernet switching hubs within the network as explained below There are two or more Ethernet switching hubs in a network Two of the hubs are doubly connected by LAN cables This double connection forms a loop between the two hubs Such a loop may have an adverse effect on the projector as well as the other network devices Check the network connection and remove the loop by disconnecting the LAN cables such that there is only one connecting cable between two hubs NOTE Although bright spots or dark spots may appear on the screen this is a unique characteristic of liquid crystal displays and it does not constitute or imply a machine defect 127 Specifications Please see the Specifications in the User s Manual concise which is a book End User License Agreement for the Projector Software e Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software modules and there exist our copyright or and third party co
101. BE EF 1B 00 BE EF 38 00 BE EF 1A 00 RESOLUTION BE EF 1E 00 BE EF 37 00 BE EF 02 00 00 00 BE EF 00 00 PEMO BE EF 01 00 01 00 E BE EF 00 00 BE EF 01 00 01 26 0000 Mo BE EF 01 00 ca BEEF 02 126 0000 00 00 01 00 01 00 Set 02 00 E a 03 00 04 00 00 00 sa FF 3D 00 00 FF REMOTE PEG ON BE EF 01 00 01 00 pies Get BE EF 00 00 OFF BE EF 01 00 31 26 00 00 REMOTE Sea N BE EF 01 00 Pen Get BE EF 2 31 26 00 00 00 00 _IMAGE 1__ BE EF 03 06 00 AA C2 01 00 01 00 Set 02 00 AP A 03 00 04 00 00 00 Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 continued on next page 37 moa COMMEN Control Description Parameter or Response POWR Power Contorol pat taney 1 Power On 0 Standby Power Status inquiry 1 Power On 2 Cool Down 11 COMPUTER IN 1 12 COMPUTER IN 2 21 COMPONENT 22 S VIDEO 23 VIDEO 31 HDMI 1 33 HDMI 2 41 USB TYPE A 51 LAN 52 USB TYPE B Input Source selection 11 COMPUTER IN 1 12 COMPUTER IN 2 21 COMPONENT 22 S VIDEO INPT Input Source inquiry rome at 31 HDMI 1 33 HDMI 2 41 USB TYPE A 51 LAN 52 USB TYPE B 10 BLANK off 11 BLANK on 20 Mute off AVMT AV Mute 21 Mute on 30 AV Mute off 31 AV Mute on 10 BLANK off 11 BLANK on Sa 20 Mute off AVMT AV Mute inquiry JiS Mulan 30 AV Mute off 31 AV Mute on continued on next page 38 Commands Control Description Parameter or Response 1st byte Refers to
102. Bridge function in the Network Guide NOTE If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time the projector may not be able to process the data correctly Connection 1 If you use wired LAN connect the computer s LAN port and the projector s LAN port with a LAN cable Use the cable that fulfills the specification shown in figure If you use wireless LAN insert the USB wireless adapter into the projector s LAN port Connect the projector s CONTROL port and the RS 232C port of the devices that you want to control with a RS 232C cable Turn the computer on and after the computer has started up turn the projector on Set the COMMUNICATION TYPE to NETWORK BRIDGE in the COMMUNICATION menu of the OPTION SERVICE menu a AX me USB wireless adapter ooog O Ss 20 DSS 09 Rey HO Q e W N USB TYPE A doo o0 0 0 Saas LAN cable CAT 5 or greater Communication settings For communication setting use the COMMUNICATION menu in the OPTION SERVICE menu Transmission method HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX NOTE For connecting the projector to your devices please read the manual for each devices and connect them correctly with suitable cables e Turn off the power and unplug both the projector and other devices before connecting them e For details of Transmission method refer to 6 4 Transmission method in the Network Guide RS ZAS GolnmlanUInlkeehtiorn NAMAK CAMMEO EIN
103. Choose a signal using the A V buttons To change the signal in the sub area switch temporarily across to the main area with the lt gt buttons Displaying the same signal on the both areas is not allowed Refer to the table for details on available input signal combinations Any combinations marked with X can not be selected Sub area sub area Input signal Main area COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER IN2 coweonenr of o x x x o o x ofo swneo of o x x x o o o x o veo of o x x xfolofolo x NOTE The combined input signals marked with an O can be selected and displayed in the PbyP mode even when the port is set to SKIP with the SOURCE SKIP on the OPTION menu M65 o o x o x coumuren o o x 0 couputer ma o o x xo o couronenr O PbyP SWAP function Press the MY BUTTON assigned the PbyP SWAP 2168 The position of the both area is exchanged without any setting change Using the menu function This projector has the following menus PICTURE IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK SECURITY and EASY MENU EASY MENU consists of functions often used and the other menus are classified into each purpose and brought together as the ADVANCED MENU Each of these menus is operated using the same methods While the projector is displaying any menu the MENU button on the projector works as the cursor buttons The basic operations of these menus are as follows ENTER button Curso
104. Configures the Authentication password The length of the text can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters Network Control Authentication Password Re enter Authentication Reenter the above password for verification Password Configures the community name if SNMP is used Configures the community name The length of the text can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters Community name Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection from Network Restart on the main menu 41 e Only numbers 0 9 and alphabet a z A Z can be used 32 3 1 Projector Web Control continued 3 1 10 Projector Control Operations of the projector can be performed with the items on the screen The categories of the items are shown in the main menu Most of the items have a submenu Refer to the table below for details NOTE The setting value may not match with the actual value if the user changes the value manually In that case please refresh the page by clicking the Refresh button Item Description MAIN POWER Turns the power on off INPUT SOURCE Selects the input source PICTURE MODE Selects the picture mode setting BLANK ON OFF Turns the BLANK screen on off MUTE Turns the
105. DUAL ANE SAALE ALTERNATE Input port change My Image Slide Show v This Schedule can be input to Projector Web Control and be executed even if the projectors are operating in Intellectual Stack v 1 This Schedule can be input to Projector Web Control even if the projectors continued on next page 30 Restrictions on Schedule function 6 Restrictions on Schedule function continued are operating in Intellectual Stack If the input port to be changed according to the Schedule function can be used in Intellectual Stack the Schedule will be executed If not it will not be executed X 2 This Schedule can be input to Projector Web Control when the projectors are operating in Intellectual Stack but it will not be executed X 3 This Schedule can neither be input to Projector Web Control nor be executed when the projectors are operating in Intellectual Stack NOTE lf the Schedule is not executed an error message will be sent in accordance with the conditions set in Schedule Execution Error on Projector Web Control MNetwork Guide 3 1 6 Alert Settings e If the Schedule function is set to turn off the power when the projectors are operating in Intellectual Stack both the Main and Sub projectors will be turned off e If the Schedule function on the Main projector is set to turn on the power the projectors will be turned on according to the LAMP MODE setting e When the two projectors are operating in the DUAL
106. Do not insert liquids or foreign object Penetration of liquids or foreign objects could result in fire or electrical shock Use special caution in households where children are present If liquids or foreign object should enter the projector immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and contact your dealer e Do not place the projector near water ex a bathroom a beach etc e Do not expose the projector to rain or moisture Do not place the projector outdoors e Do not place flower vases pots cups cosmetics liquids such as water etc on or around the projector e Do not place metals combustibles etc on or around the projector e To avoid penetration of foreign objects do not put the projector into a case or bag together with any thing except the accessories of the projector signal cables and connectors Never disassemble and modify The projector contains high voltage components Modification and or disassembly of the projector or accessories could result in fire or electrical shock e Never open the cabinet e Ask your dealer to repair and clean insider Do not give the projector any shock or impact If the projector should be shocked and or broken it could result in an injury and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock If the projector is shocked immediately turn off the power switch disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and contact your dea
107. E CommandData Data ration T Header CRC i BE EF 03 06 00 19 D3 02 00 00 60 00 00 Get Example return Names Power 00 00 02 00 Off Cool down ao Input Source BE EF 06 00 D9 D8 02 00 20 60 00 00 Example return 00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 Error Status et Normal Cover error Fan error Lamp error 04 00 05 00 07 00 08 00 Temp error Air flow error Cold error Filter error LENS SHIFT 1 LENS MEMORY Set 3 Get LENS MEMORY Execute BE EF 03 06 00 E8 90 06 oo 08 24 00 00 LOAD LENS MEMORY Execute BE EF 03 06 00 14 91 06 00 09 24 00 00 SAVE LENS MEMORY continued on next page 19 MAGNIFY KA dialed Lean diel FREEZE a SHADE PbyP es oe ee COMPUTER 2 Set 01 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 03 00 PbyP Set HDMI 2 OD 00 LEFT SOURCE 05 00 02 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 PhyP RIGHT SOURCE 20 continued on next page CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC a ae Header oe Action Ure eating code Beis HOBE Example return 00 00 01 00 04 00 NORMAL CINEMA DYNAMIC 20 00 21 00 22 00 BOARD BLACk BOARD GREEN WHITEBOARD 40 00 41 00 10 00 DAY TIME DICOM SIM Custom Get BE EF 03 06 00 89 D2 02 00 03 20 00 00 BRIGHTNESS eas BE EF 06 00 58 D3 06 00 00 70 00 00 CONTRAST oe BE EF o6 00 A4 D2 06 00 01 70 00 00
108. E the A V buttons then press the gt button to ALERT Sa display the LAMP MODE dialog 2 Use the A V buttons in the dialog to highlight DUAL or ALTERNATE DUAL Turns on the projectors at the same time ALTERNATE Turns on the projectors alternately 3 Press the lt button to return to the previous menu or press the gt button to complete the setting E79 NOTE If DUAL is selected a menu to select MAIN or SUB appears on screen when a button on the control panel of the projector or remote control is pressed Select the projector that you want to operate Refer to the examples below When the MENU button is pressed a menu to select MAIN or SUB is displayed If MAIN is selected EASY MENU or ADVANCED MENU of the Main projector is displayed When one of the buttons from KEYSTONE FOCUS ZOOM ZOOM and LENS SHIFT is pressed a menu to select MAIN or SUB is displayed If MAIN is selected each menu or dialog of the Main projector is displayed lt Only for CP X8160 CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 gt When the ENTER button is pressed for three seconds a menu to select MAIN or SUB is displayed If MAIN is selected the Status Monitor on the Main Projector can be operated e When DUAL is selected for EASY MENU EE LAMP MODE there are operating b AUTO KEYSTONE EXECUTE restrictions as follows 1 MENU 3 e ki ONE o z AUTO POWER OFF and m PICTUREMGOE NORMAL FREEZE functions on both INSTALLATION projectors are disabled
109. FF This projector has 4 memories for adjustment data for all the items of the PICTURE menu Selecting a function using the A V buttons and pressing the gt or ENTER button performs each function SAVE 1 SAVE 2 SAVE 3 SAVE 4 leet lt gt LOAD 3 LOAD 2 LOAD 1 SAVE 1 SAVE 2 SAVE 3 SAVE 4 Performing a SAVE function saves the current adjustment data into the memory linked in the number included in the function s name e Remember that the current data being stored of a memory will be lost by saving new data into the memory MY MEMORY LOAD 1 LOAD 2 LOAD 3 LOAD 4 Performing a LOAD function loads the data from the memory linked in the number included in the function s name and adjusts the picture automatically depending on the data e The LOAD functions whose linked memory has no data are skipped e Remember that the current adjusted condition will be lost by loading data If you want to keep the current adjustment please save it before performing a LOAD function e There may be some noise and the screen may flicker for a moment when loading data This is not malfunction e You can perform the LOAD function using MY BUTTON Please see MY BUTTON item in OPTION menu 68 46 IWASE MONU From the IMAGE menu items shown in the table below can be performed zen e Select an item using the A V cursor buttons and E ER Hati Lo press the cursor button or ENTER button to emoa fl ees execute the item Then perform i
110. Fan error one of 0 to 2 2nd byte Refers to Lamp error one of 0 to 2 3rd byte Refers to Temptrature error one of 0 to 2 4th byte Refers to Cover error one of 0 to 2 Error Status inquiry Sth byte Refers to Filter error one of 0 to 2 6th byte Refers to Other error one of 0 to 2 The mearning of 0 to 2 is as given below 0 Error is not detected 1 Warning 2 Error LAMP 2 anne S 1st number digits 1 to 5 Lamp Time l p Aay 2nd number 0 Lamp off 1 Lamp on INST Input Source List inquiry 11 12 21 22 23 31 33 41 51 52 ee Responds with the name set in the item NAME Projector Name inquiry PROJECTOR NAME of the NETWORK menu INF1 Manufucturer s Name HITACHI inquiry CP X8150 CP X8160 CP WX8240 Model Name inquiry CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 INFO Other Information inquiry en with the factory information and so CLSS _ Class Information inquiry NOTE The password used in PJLink is the same as the password set in the Web Control To use PJLink without authentication do not set any password in Web Browser Control e For specifications of PULink see the web site of the Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association URL http pjlink jomia or jp as of Feb 2012 39 Projector CP X8150 CP X8160 CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 cP wus44o Hi CP WU8450 User s Manual concise ENGLISH Thank you for purchasing this projector Please read
111. ID Use the A V buttons on the REMOTE ID menu to select ID and press the gt button ALL 10820304 The projector is controlled by the remote control whose ID button is set the same number as this number When the ALL is selected the projector is controlled by a remote control irrespective of the ID setting continued on next page 71 ltem scription Selecting this item displays COMMUNICATION menu In this menu you can configure the serial communication settings of the projector using the CONTROL port E OPTION SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION RENE THOG HALF DUPLEX RESPONSE LIMIT TIME OFF e Select an item using the cursor buttons A V Then pressing the button opens the submenu for the setting item you selected Or pressing the lt button instead of the button makes the menu back to the previous one without changing the setup Each submenu can be operated as described above e When COMMUNICATION TYPE below is set to OFF the other items except STACK in COMMUNICATION menu are invalid e For the function of serial communication refer to SERVICE the Network Guide continued COMMUNICATION OMMUNICATION TYPE Select the communication type for transmission via the CONTROL port NETWORK BRIDGE WIRELESS 2 NETWORK BRIDGE WIRED Q OFF NETWORK BRIDGE Select this type if it is required to control an external device as a network terminal via this projector from the computer Select WIRELE
112. ITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 FF Q O O e e O continued on next page 29 Command Data Names nT re cre Command Data Names Operation Type Header ore Ho command Setting code TOLE E i p mo T VOLUME LAN p P Get BEE EF 03 06 00 9D CF 02 00 6C 20 UE o Get BEEF 03 06 00 61 CE 02 00 6D 20 ree T GONPONENT 0000 verde et 00 00 TR 0000 OU et 00 00 VIDEO BE EF 0000 LA peremen VOLUME ALL p oe fee EF 5 06 00 ps oroo oz 20 0000 MuTE S L on _ BE EF 03 06 00 D6 D2 01 00 02 20 0100 Get BEEF 03 06 00 75 D3 02 00 02 20 0000 se ON __ BE EF 03 06 00 FE D4 01 00 1C 20 01 00 SPEAKER OFF 8 EF 03 06 00 6E D5 01 00 1 20 0000 Get BE EF 03 06 00 5D D5 02 00 1c 20 00 00 30 continued on next page CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC ee Header one Action Type eating cede AUDIO IN1 AUDIO AUDIO IN2 SOURCE gt AUDIO N3 COMPUTER IN1 OFF et AUDIO IN1 5E DD AUDIO AUDIO IN2 AE DD SOURCE gt AUDIOINS 3E DC COMPUTER IN2 OFF CE DC et O ep G G FD DC AUDIO IN 4A DE AUDIO IN2 BA DE Set AUDIO INS 2A DF AUDIO LAN 8A DS FF DA DF t E9 DF 02 00 AUDIO IN E6 DC AUDIO IN2 16 DC 01 00 Ree Set _AuDio ms 86 DD a A BE EF o3 06 00 B6 Do 01 00 OFF 76 DD Get 45 DD 02 00 t Ge gt Cc O c n Ww
113. IZE AUTO ADJUST EXECUTE PROGRESSIVE VIDEO NR COLOR SPACE COMPONENT INPUT E1150 VIDEO FORMAT HDMI FORMAT HDMI RANGE COMPUTER IN FRAME LOCK RESOLUTION AUTOKEYSTONE 4 KEYSTONE FE KEYSTONE SETUP Q454 PERFECTFIT AUTO ECO MODE ECO MODE INSTALLATION STANDBY MODE MONITOR OUT AUDIO 157 VOLUME SPEAKER AUDIO SOURCE HDMI AUDIO SCREEN 59 LANGUAGE MENU POSITION BLANK START UP MyScreen MyScreen Lock MESSAGE SOURCE NAME TEMPLATE C C SOURCE SKIP AUTO SEARCH AUTO KEYSTONE DIRECT POWER ON AUTO POWER OFF SHADE TIMER OP TION eae USB TYPE B LAMP TIME FILTER TIME MY BUTTON SERVICE WIRELESS SETUP WIRELESS INFORMATION WIRED SETUP NETWORK 176 WIRED INFORMATION PROJECTOR NAME MY IMAGE AMX D D PRESENTATION SERVICE SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE MyScreen PASSWORD PIN LOCK TRANSITION DETECTOR MY TEXT PASSWORD MY TEXT DISPLAY MY TEXT WRITING SECURITY INDICATOR STACK LOCK SECURITY 87 41 EASY MENU MEASYMENU SE SELECT AUTO KEYSTONE EXECUTE From the EASY MENU items shown in the table A KEveTONE os below can be performed pictus Mec Select an item using the A V cursor buttons Then cuericarcy perform it according to the following table Fre lars EXECUTE amp LANGUAGE T ADVANCED MENU 1024 x 768 BGOHZ Item Description ASPECT Using the lt gt buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio See the ASPECT item in IMAGE menu 447 Using the but
114. L428 e The power on event has the lowest priority among the all events that are defined at the same time e There are 3 types of Scheduling 1 daily 2 weekly 3 specific date L427 e The priority for scheduled events is as follows 1 specific date 2 weekly 3 daily e Up to five specific dates are available for scheduled events Priority is given to those with the lower numbers when more than one event has been scheduled for the same date and time e g Specific date No 1 has priority over Specific date No 2 and so on e Be sure to set the date and time before enabling scheduled events L430 Once you turn off the projector in the SAVING mode EQSETUP menu in the Operating Guide or the AC power the current date and time setting is reset 59 7 3 Event Scheduling continued Schedule Settings 27 Schedule settings can be configured from a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser and select Projector Web Control from the selection window 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Schedule Settings on the main menu and select the required schedule item For example if you want to perform the command every Sunday please select the Sunday Click the Enable check box to enable scheduling Enter the date month day for specific date scheduling Click t
115. Main Set B using PERFECT FIT 7 For Intellectual Stack users 1 Press the MENU button on the remote control or the ee ek control panel on Main Set B to display the MENU Sh a ee a dialog a Highlight MAIN with the A V buttons and press the gt button Menu on Main Set B will appear 2 Using the A W lt gt buttons on the remote control or Em Co the control panel on Main Set B select PERFECT i e FIT from EASY MENU or the SETUP menu of AD m i VANCED MENU MoOperating Guide EASY MENU E or SETUP menu The image for Intellectual Stack appears on screen This image includes a TEMPLATE screen with the PERFECT FIT dialog from Main Set B and another om o TEMPLATE screen from Sub Set A PRG aaa aE 3 Using PERFECT FIT on Main Set B adjust the im age size and position of Main Set B to superimpose well to the image of Sub Set A MoOperating Guide H zg EASY MENU or SETUP menu nage Aron SUR ety i lt CP X8160 CP X8160 It is recommended to adjust in the following ways CP WX8240 CP WX8255 gt 1 Roughly adjust the four corners in the order below Top left Top right Bottom right Bottom left 2 Fine adjust the four corners in the same way lt CP SX8350 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 gt i Superimposed image NOTE Refer to NOTES for all users 72 11 Installation For Simple Stack users 1 Press the MENU button on the remote control to displa
116. N gt http www hitachi co jp proj
117. NENT S VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO Buttons for input ports NOTE While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu the projector will keep checking every port sequentially till an input signal is detected Q465 e It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port 26 Selecting an aspect ratio 4 Press ASPECT button on the remote control Each time you press the button the projector switches the mode for aspect ratio in turn ol DoS A Opa OD PEDO OO OREM Of omme oee 0 V o HEE Hog BESHE 0 oiy JE ASPECT b O For a computer signal utton CP X8150 CP X8160 E NORMAL gt 4 3 gt 16 9 gt 16 10 T CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 NORMAL gt 4 3 gt 16 9 gt 16 10 gt NATIVE Eo o O For an HDMI signal CP X8150 CP X8160 NORMAL gt 4 3 gt 16 9 gt 16 10 gt 14 9 g CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 NORMAL gt 4 3 gt 16 9 gt 16 10 gt 14 9 gt NATIVE E re O For a video signal s video signal or component video signal CP X8150 CP X8160 4 3 gt 16 9 gt 14 9 g CP SX8350 4 3 gt 16 9 gt 14 9 gt NATIVE g CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 4 3 gt 16 9 gt 16 10 gt 14 9 gt NATIVE B o O For an input signal from the LAN USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B ports or if there is no signal CP X8150 CP X8160 CP SX8350 4 3
118. NING PA strong light is emitted when the projector s power is on Do not look into the lens of the projector or look inside of the projector through any of the projector s openings NOTE Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices e The projector has the DIRECT POWER ON function which can make the projector automatically turn on For more information please see User s Manual Operating Guide Adjusting the projector s elevator When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to the left or right use the elevator feet to place the projector horizontally Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to project at a suitable angle to the screen elevating the front side of the projector within 9 degrees This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons lt An elevator foot is adjustable while pushing the elevator Dreg button on the same side as it i To 1 Holding the projector push the elevator buttons to aor ck loose the elevator feet push the elevator Position the front side of the projector to the desired A t height Release the elevator buttons in order to lock the elevator feet After making sure that the elevator feet are locked put the projector down gently I To finely If necessary the elevator feet can be manually adjust twist twisted to make more precise adjustments Hold the the foot projector when twisting the feet ae Sh ACAUTION PD
119. ONROL IN and OUT ports To connect the wired remote control or another projector to the REMOTE CONTROL IN or OUT ports use audio cables with 3 5 mm diameter stereo mini plugs This function is useful when a wireless remote signal may not reliably reach the projector Fastening the cables To get together the signal cables and prevent them from coming off fasten them to the projector using a commercially available plastic cable tie Use a cable tie of size 2 0x5 0mm or smaller It is recommended to curl the end of the tie slightly before you thread it to the tie holder to enable it to get through easily Cable tie Fastening the adapter cover When using the USB wireless adapter be sure to connect the adapter to the further USB TYPE A port from the LAN port and use the supplied adapter cover 1 Loosen the screw marked with triangle on the bottom left of the USB TYPE A ports 2 Insert the tab of the cover into the hole at the upper right of the USB TYPE A ports in the direction of the arrow 3 Align the screw holes on the projector and the cover Then insert the screw removed from the projector into the hole and tighten the screw Security sl Using the security bar and slot A commercially available anti theft chain or wire can be attached to the security bar on the projector Refer to the figure to choose an anti theft chain or wire Also this product has the security slot fo
120. Operate the projectors from the control panel of the Main projector or with the remote control pointing at the Main projector For details on operating by remote control and from the control panel refer to 3 7 Important Information for Intellectual Stack For Simple Stack both projectors can receive the remote control signals To avoid incorrect operations with the remote control it is recommended to operate both projectors with the control panel or a wired remote control or one projector with the remote control and the other with the control panel or a wired remote control In this case disable the remote control receiving on the other projector with the KEY LOCK feature MoOperating Guide OPTION menu continued on next page Introduction 1 1 Basic information and preparations continued NOTICE gt Intellectual Stack can be operated only in pairs of the same model projectors gt A maximum of two projectors can be used as Intellectual Stack gt Depending on the installation and surrounding environment images projected from the two projectors may not superimpose well enough The images cannot superimpose well enough especially when the screen is slanted deformed or the surface is uneven e Images projected immediately after turning on the projectors are unstable due to rising internal temperature Wait for more than 20 minutes before starting to adjust the superimposed images e The image positions may shift due to
121. P WU8450 1000h 2000h 5000h amp 10000h 15000h 20000h amp OFF After choosing an item except OFF the message REMINDER HRS PASSED will appear after the timer reaches the interval time set by this feature 4119 When the OFF is chosen the message will not appear Utilize this feature to keep the air filter clean setting the suitable time according to your environment of this projector e Please take care of the filter unit periodically even if there is no message If the air filter becomes to be blocked by dust or other matter the internal temperature will rise which could cause malfunction or reduce the lifetime of the projector e Please be careful with the operating environment of the projector SERVICE and the condition of the filter unit continued LENS TYPE 1 Select the lens type currently used using the A V buttons and press the gt or ENTER button Please select one of following according to the type of lens unit If AUTO is selected the projector determines the lens type automatically 2 A message dialog is displayed for confirmation Press the or ENTER button to save the lens type e This setting has an influence on the keystone distortion etc e The lens type determined by the projector will be displayed on the right of AUTO e If the projector cannot determine the lens type automatically when this item is set to AUTO UNKNOWN LENS is displayed on the right of AUTO e About the
122. PASSWORD PASSWORD AGAIN box enter the same password again CHANGE 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the gt S HOTE HEF PASSWORD button and the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box will be displayed for about 30 seconds please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or button on the projector will close the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box e Please do not forget your password poog continued on next page 87 ltem scription The MyScreen PASSWORD function can be used to prohibit access to the MyScreen function and prevent the currently registered MyScreen image from being overwritten 1 Turning on the MyScreen PASSWORD 1 1 Use the A buttons on the SECURITY menu to select MyScreen PASSWORD and press the gt button to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu 1 2 Use the A buttons on the MyScreen EL MyScreen PASSWORD PASSWORD on off menu to select ON ENTER NEW PASSWORD The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small DOREN will be displayed ENTER NEW PASSWORD 1 3 Use the A lt gt buttons to enter the box small password Move the cursor to the right side ETT of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small aaa aes and press the button to display the NEW TEE PASSWORD AGAIN box enter the same PASSWORD again 1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the gt button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box
123. PE as the default setting e Using the COMMUNICATION menu set up the communication Remember that an unsuitable setup could cause malfunction of communication e When either one of the NETWORK BRIDGE settings is selected in the COMMUNICATION TYPE menu RS 232C commands cannot be received from the CONTROL port 6 3 Communication port For the NETWORK BRIDGE function send the data from the computer to the projector with using the Network Bridge Port that is configured in the Port Settings of web browser L23 NOTE Except for 41794 9715 9716 9719 9720 5900 5500 4352 between 1024 and 65535 can be set up as the Network Bridge Port number It is set to 9717 as the default setting 53 6 4 Transmission method The transmission method can be selected from the menus only when the NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE LQOPTION menu gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide HALF DUPLEX e FULL DUPLEX 6 4 1 HALF DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication but only one direction either transmitting or receiving data is allowed at a time The method does not allow the projector to receive the data from the computer while waiting for response data from an external device After the projector receives the response data from an external device or the response limit time is past the projector can receive the data from the computer That means that the projector controls tr
124. Pentium 4 2 8 GHz or higher e Graphic card 16 bit XGA or higher e Memory 512 MB or higher e Hard disk space 30 MB or higher e USB A Port e USB cable 1 piece 109 USB Display continued Starting USB Display Select the USB DISPLAY for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu When you connect your computer to the USB TYPE B port on the projector using a USB cable the projector will be recognized as a CD ROM drive on your computer Then the software in the projector LiveViewerLiteUSB exe will run automatically and the application LiveViewer Lite for USB will be ready on your computer for the USB Display The application LiveViewer Lite for USB will be automatically closed when the USB cable is unplugged NOTE If the software does not start automatically this is typically because CD ROM autorun is disabled on your OS follow the instructions below 1 Click on the Start button on the toolbar and select the Run 2 Enter F LiveViewerLiteUSB exe and then press the OK If your CD ROM drive is not drive F on your computer you will need to replace F with the correct drive letter assigned to your CD ROM drive e CD ROM autorun is disabled while the screen saver is running e The image transmission from the computer is suspended while the password protected screen saver is running To resume the transmission exit the screen saver e Check our web site for the latest version of the software and
125. Projector CP X8150 CP X8160 CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 User s Manual detailed Operating Guide Thank you for purchasing this projector JN oyoyUhe inves MEMEL Various symbols are used in this manual The meanings of these symbols are described below AWARNING This symbol indicates information that if ignored could possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling A CAUTION This symbol indicates information that if ignored could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble Q Please refer to the pages written following this symbol NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice e The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual e The reproduction transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent Trademark acknowledgment e Mac is a registered trademark of Apple Inc e Windows DirectDraw and Direct3D are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e VESA and DDC are trademarks of the Video Electronics Standard Association e HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries e Trademar
126. SS or WIRED as your network connection mode The CONTROL port doesn t accept RS 232C commands M6 Network Bridge Function in the Network Guide OFF Select this mode to receive RS 232C commands using the CONTROL port e OFF is selected as the default setting e When you select the NETWORK BRIDGE check the item TRANSMISSTION METHOD 473 continued on next page 72 lem Description O SERIAL SETTINGS Select the serial communication condition for the CONTROL port BAUD RATE 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps tw PARITY NONE ODD EVEN D e The BAUD RATE is fixed to 19200bps and PARITY is fixed NONE when the COMMUNICATION TYPE is set to OFF 72 SERVICE COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION METHOD continued continued Select the transmission method for communication by the NETWORK BRIDGE from the CONTROL port HALF DUPLEX FULL DUPLEX HALF DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication but only one direction either transmitting or receiving data is allowed at a time FULL DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication transmitting and receiving data at the same time e HALF DUPLEX is selected as the default setting e If you select HALF DUPLEX check the setting of the item RESPONSE LIMIT TIME 474 continued on next page 73 o ltem escription RESPONSE LIMIT TIME Select the time period to wait for receiving response data from
127. TO is selected for the VIDEO FORMAT item in the INPUT menu 151 The vertical position and horizontal position will be AUTO ADJUST automatically set to the default EXECUTE For a component video signal The vertical position and horizontal position will be automatically set to the default The horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted e The automatic adjustment operation requires approx 10 seconds Also please note that it may not function correctly with some input e When this function is performed for a video signal a certain extra such as a line may appear outside a picture e When this function is performed for a computer signal a black frame may be displayed on the edge of the screen depending on the computer model e The items adjusted by this function may vary when the FINE or DISABLE is selected for the AUTO ADJUST item of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu 469 49 INO Taney From the INPUT menu items shown in the table TY WID below can be performed E t RSE ATO Select an item using the A V cursor buttons and a ii HOMI FORMAT press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to A NETWOK COMPUTER execute the item Then perform it according to the O EASYWEMU m RESOLUTION following table COMPUTER IN 1 pttem scription Using the A V buttons switches the progress mode TV FILM amp OFF ee e This function works only for a video signal s video signal component video signal of 480i 60
128. TOR ON alarm the lamp will turn off e Keystone adjustment feature has been prohibited as long as the Transition Detector function is on 1 Turning on the TRANSITION DETECTOR 1 1 Use the A V buttons on the SECURITY menu TRANSITION DETECTOR to select TRANSITION DETECTOR and press the gt or the ENTER button to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu 1 2 Use the A V buttons on the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu to select ON Selecting ON will save the setting of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD current angle and the INSTALLATION setting o0o00 KO The ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small ENTER NEW PASSWORD will be displayed box small 1 3 Use the A gt buttons to enter a password Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small TRANSITION DETECTOR and press the gt button to display the NEW ORD AGAIN PASSWORD AGAIN box enter the same petite TRANSITION password again DETECTOR 1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press the gt button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or the button on the projector will return to the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu e Please do not forget your TRANSITION DETECTOR password e This function will activate only when the projector is started after turning off the AC power e This feature may not function properly if the proje
129. TYPE B LAMP TIME Get BE EF 03 06 00 c2 FF 02 00 90 10 00 00 Lower Bytes oe HIE Get BE EF 03 06 00 2A FD 02 00 9E 10 00 00 Higher Bytes SEA TIME Execute BE EF 03 06 00 58 DC o6 00 30 70 o0 00 Reset FILTER TIME Get BE EF 03 06 00 c2 Fo 02 oo ao 10 o0 00 Lower Bytes FER MME Get BE EF 03 o6 00 De Fc 02 oo 9F 10 00 00 Higher Bytes cae BE EF 06 00 98 ce 06 00 40 70 00 00 SOURCE SKIP COMPONENT SOURCE SKIP Se S VIDEO i 2 SOURCE SKIP Se VIDEO G e S AUTO SEARCH Ge e O O O AUTO O O O pmi KEYSTONE G DIRECT POWER ON i m e e 3 FF N t FF N t FF N t t 3h 6h continued on next page 35 CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC alia Header oe Actia Type eating cede 03 9A 3F Set M B TA 1B 00 38 00 TA 00 1E 00 37 00 Get 02 00 00 00 22 00 01 0 36 16 00 25 00 01 00 01 36 32 00 10 00 12 00 MY BUTTON 2 t OJo O oO _ O oO oO oO 01 36 11 00 15 00 13 00 14 00 1B 00 Set ETO Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 36 continued on next page CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC laa Header oe Action L Ore eating cede BE EF BE EF MESSENGER BE EF BE EF INFORMATION BE EF AUTO KEYSTONE V BE EF MY MEMORY BE EF set ACTIVE IRIS BE EF MY BUTTON 4 PICTURE MODE BE EF FILTER RESET BE EF
130. This completes the setting If Intellectual Stack with the RS 232C connection is used all settings or modifications related to Intellectual Stack menu operations must be performed on the Main projector The Main projector functions according to the input settings for Intellectual Stack 5 2 Checking Main projector s operating status For Intellectual Stack all settings or modifications related to menu operations must be performed on the Main projector Before operating the menu for Intellectual Stack check if the Main projector is functioning 1 Press the MENU button on the remote control 2 If the MENU dialog as shown on the right appears on the screen the two projectors are operating in DUAL mode and the Main projector is operating Go to 5 4 Setting the menu 27 If the dialog does not appear LAMP MODE is set to ALTERNATE and either the Main or Sub projector is operating Go to next 3 Use the A W lt P buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt OPTION ARE OMAGRATIO tA gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION STACK wo Mane gt STACK SUB INPUT SOURCE FOLLOW HAMNAT 4 CRE TURN STACK menu will appear on screen CQ Operating Guide OPTION menu 4 Check the STACK MODE setting in the STACK menu If MAIN is displayed the Main projector is operating Go to 5 4 Setting the menu 227 If SUB is displayed the Main projector is turned off and the Sub projector is operating Go to 5 3 Starting up Main projec
131. UT button the character is selected Then follow the same procedure as described at the item 2 above 4 To finish entering text move the cursor to ihe OK on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previous PROJECTOR NAME without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the lt ENTER or INPUT button continued on next page 83 ltem scription Selecting this item displays the MY IMAGE menu am IMAGE 2 PRESENTATDONFILE Use the application to transfer the Cray raged Meath image data It can be downloaded OCANCEL Ok from the Hitachi web site http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com Use the A F buttons to select an item which is a still image by the MY IMAGE M4 My Image Function in the Network Guide and the gt or ENTER button to display the image e The item without image stored cannot be selected MY IMAGE e The image names are each displayed in 16 characters or less To switch the image displayed Use the A V buttons To return to the menu Press the lt button on the remote control To erase the image displayed and its source file in the projector 1 Press the RESET button on the remote Z MY IMAGE T control while displaying an image to display DELETE O MAEI O DE the MY IMAGE DELETE menu 2 Press the button to perform to erase To stop erasing press the lt button Use the A V butto
132. YPE B port of the projector with a USB A port of the computer via a USB cable Then select MOUSE for USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu 167 Works like the Page Down button on a keyboard Works like the Page Up button on a keyboard 6 Works like the left click button on a mouse 6 Works like the right click button on a mouse ESEJE Moves the mouse s cursor in the direction of the arrow YIN 8 Exit Closes the tool bar and exits the drawing function e When exiting the drawing mode all unsaved drawings are lost 9 Minimize Minimizes the tool bar T Touching or clicking the minimized tool bar icon displays the tool bar again 108 USB Display The projector can display images transferred from a computer via an USB cable L11 NOTE When the screen resolution of your computer is over specified the computer image is shrunk in specified size as below before transferring to the projector CP X8150 CP X8160 1024 x 768 XGA The other models 1280 x 800 The transferred image is displayed as shrunk on the projected screen even if the panel resolution of the projector is larger than above Hardware and software requirement for computer e OS One of the following 32 bit version only Windows XP Home Edition Professional Edition Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Business Ultimate Enterprise Windows 7 Starter Home Basic Home Premium Professional Ultimate Enterprise e CPU
133. abesneantapennanetedsennaacisundenes 24 SILOAM OCINE saie pred nE EAE E ES RAS EER E N IEEE REONE NEA 25 Nel Schedule SENGS errirsirirenain inap E EAR n Ea 27 SES Date hime CMS act cee a atc cs pet ott ee roe ERE ENERE E 30 SAREES TAE UE EAA T EET A T AEA T E E A E E 32 SAE e E GCONIMGL EE E TE T E E T oo Oe te Vil PRION Control ssrsyri rromani piece ceen EOR Rii 39 3 1 12 Projector STAUS ct ast heart cat arctic ERA EEE A PERAE nanlnenetanmnieed EEA AREKEA 41 Oe alo Ee Fe Sle E E EEA N 41 3 2 Crestron e Control oie eeeecceccesccesseseeesceescerscesseeeeereceesereeassereesreersenseeeeaee 42 ie 2 MaN ONO ssns ip EEE E aTa i 43 eZ TOON WINGO arrosan E AE E E E EEEE 45 Bin O WNG sos iao AEE E EE E O sees 47 32A Hep Desk WN easier pcos cecnsin ws cibeiemeacicemuenuiedosaiisee ens AETERNE EESE EEEREN 48 32 9 EMErgeney AICI ssrin ara aE R ERa EN satadbiiatesamerstnnsaacpiasaenetuenaantaiatn 49 4 My Image Function s ssssassnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 50 5 M ssenger FUNCTION sesers eaaa 51 6 Network Bridge Function ccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesenesenees 52 6 1 Connecting devices cite cette eee tes ages tiation eames aeeeceeesec nee 52 6 2 Communication Ss se sense cence hese ceseteete eenereestaeps tuscan creatine abit imennmiaetemeeuee 53 6 3 C ommu unicaton POT cn ciescee Some tcc iania n aa E AE reunite EEEE EEN Sh 53 6 4 Transmission method is sadicaivowissinaneneudidannandaadsresnaialsiw
134. able for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A B or HDMI 1 2 port continued on next page 48 ltem scription Using the lt 4 gt buttons adjusts the horizontal phase to eliminate flicker Right Left e This item can be selected only for a computer signal or a component video signal This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A B or HDMI 1 2 port Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the horizontal size Small Large e This item can be selected only for a computer signal This function is unavailable for a signal from the LAN USB TYPE A B or HDMI 1 2 port e When this adjustment is excessive the picture may not be displayed correctly In such a case please reset the adjustment by pressing the RESET button on the remote control during this operation e Images might appear degraded when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction Selecting this item performs the automatic adjustment feature For a computer signal The vertical position the horizontal position and the horizontal phase will be automatically adjusted Make sure that the application window is set to its maximum size prior to attempting to use this feature A dark picture may still be incorrectly adjusted Use a bright picture when adjusting For a video signal and s video signal The video format best suited for the respective input signal will be selected automatically This function is available only when the AU
135. al Area Connection to open the menu and select Properties 6 Select Internet Protocol Version 4 TCP IPv4 and click Properties 7 Select Use the following IP address and configure the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway for the computer accordingly If a DHCP server exists in the network you can select Obtain an IP address automatically and the IP address will be assigned automatically After setting is complete click OK to close the window continued on next page 1 3 Manual network connection setting Wired LAN continued About IP address m Setting manually The Network address portion of the IP address setting on your computer must be the same as the setting on the projector Also the entire IP address on the computer must not overlap with that of the other devices on the same network including the projector For example The projector s settings are as follows IP address 192 168 1 254 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Network address 192 168 1 in this case Therefore specify the computer s IP address as follows IP address 192 168 1 xxx xxx shows decimal number Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Network address 192 168 1 in this case Select from 1 to 254 for xxx not duplicating with any other equipments In this case since the IP address of the projector is 192 168 1 254 specify a setting between 1 to 253 for the computer NOTE 0 0 0 0 cannot be set to the
136. ample of connections NOTE Some USB storage devices and or USB hubs may not operate properly e Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the Thumbnail screen to secure your data 197 If you do not run the REMOVE USB function and remove the USB storage device the time stamp may not be recorded correctly 105 Drawing function continued Using the Drawing function Touching or clicking the connected Hitachi Pen tablet USB mouse starts up drawing mode A tool bar like the figure below is displayed on the projector screen while in the drawing mode Touching clicking an icon on the tool bar enables the following functions Touching anywhere on the tool bar except an icon and dragging moves the toobar 4 5 6 7 8 9 gJ eis NOTE Images may be copyrighted in which case permission from the copyright holder is necessary for use in accordance with the copyright act and other applicable laws e The drawing function does not support drawing on images from the LAN port or the USB TYPE B port of the projector If you operate the Hitachi Pen tablet USB mouse while these images are displayed the input source may automatically switch to USB TYPE A port 1 Pen Selects the pen function The cursor turns into a Pencil S dragging it draws a line of f the specified pen color and size The cursor turns into a Laser Pointer Dragging it does not
137. and at the end of each line 1st line START STOP INTERVAL and PLAY MODE settings E197 2nd line and after file name interval time rotation setting and skip setting interval time It can be set from 0 to 999900 ms with an increment of 100 ms rotation setting roti means a rotation at 90 degrees clockwise rot2 and rot3 increase another 90 degrees in order skip setting SKIP means that the image will not be displayed in the Slideshow NOTE The maximum length in a line on the playlist txt file is 255 characters including linefeed If any line exceeds the limit the playlist txt file becomes invalid e Up to 999 files can be registered to the Playlist However if some folders exist in the same directory the limit number is decreased by the number of folders Any files over the limit will not be shown in the Slideshow e If the storage device is protected or does not have sufficient space the playlist txt file cannot be created e For the Slideshow settings refer to the section Slideshow mode 101 103 Drawing function Drawing function enables you to draw on the projector s screen with Hitachi Pen tablet or USB mouse connected to the USB TYPE A ports This function is an interactive tool that offers effective features for making classroom and business presentations more fun and easier to understand v Drawing on projected images You can draw pictures or text on projecte
138. ansmitting and receiving the data to synchronize the communication To use the HALF DUPLEX method set up the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME following the instructions below TCP IP data Protocol change Serial data Wired LAN RS 232C RS 232C cable External device oe ea AP Response limit Discarding data time Transmitting data Response data Using the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME menu set the waiting time for response data from an external device MOPTION menu gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION in the Operating Guide OFF e 1s 2s e 3s e OFF 54 6 4 Transmission method continued NOTE With using the HALF DUPLEX method the projector can send out 254 byte data as maximum at once e If it is not required to monitor the response data from an external device and the RESPONSE LIMIT TIME is set to OFF the projector can receive the data from the computer and send it out to an external device continuously The OFF is selected as the default setting 6 4 2 FULL DUPLEX This method lets the projector make two way communication transmitting and receiving data at the same time without monitoring response data from an external device With using this method the computer and an external device will send the data out of synchronization If it is required to synchronize them set the computer to make the synchronization NOTE In case that the computer controls to synchronize transmitting and receiving the data
139. anual concise Arrangement and Adjusting the projector s elevator NOTE Set the tilt angle of Set A to within 9 degrees from the level line Setting up Set A 1 Turn on Set A 2 Perform the INSTALLATION setting first if necessary as it may change the image position MoOperating Guide SETUP menu Adjust the image of Set A to fit the screen with the ZOOM FOCUS and LENS SHIFT features MoOperating Guide Adjusting the lens Adjust the image position using KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT if necessary Operating Guide EASY MENU or SETUP menu oo NOTE KEYSTONE cannot be operated when PERFECT FIT is in use To adjust the image using both KEYSTONE and PERFECT FIT adjust KEYSTONE first e If you are using Simple Stack go to 2 3 Installation of the second projector Set B 8 continued on next page Installation 2 2 Installing the first projector Set A Setting up Set A continued 4 Display the menu with the MENU button Operating Guide Using the menu function 5 Use the A lt P buttons to go into the following menu ADVAN C E D M E N U gt O PT O N SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION STACK gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION E TTO gt STACK N Siam 4 RE TURN STACK menu will appear on screen EQOperating Guide OPTION menu 6 Use the A V buttons to highlight STACK STACK MODE MODE and press the button to display ca the STACK MODE dialog cesses Highlight SUB pressing the
140. as heater etc Avoid Magnetism Manufacture strongly recommends to avoid any magnetic contact that is not shielded or protected on or near the projector itself ie Magnetic Security Devices or other projector accessory that contains magnetic material that has not been provided by the manufacture etc Magnetic objects may cause interruption of the projector s internal mechanical performance which may interfere with cooling fans speed or stopping and may cause the projector to completely shut down OOO gt O CAUTION Remove the power cord for complete separation e For safety purposes disconnect the power cord if the projector is not to be used for prolonged periods of time m vih e Before cleaning turn off and unplug the projector Neglect could result in sane ne fire or electrical shock power outlet Ask your dealer to cleaning inside of the projector about every year Accumulations of dust inside the projector cause result in fire or malfunction f Cleaning inside is more effective if performed before every humid periods such as rainy season e Do not clean inside yourself because it is dangerous NOTE Do not give the remote control any physical impact A physical impact could cause damage or malfunction of the remote control e Take care not to drop the remote control e Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the remote control Take care of the lens e Close the slide lens door
141. audio mute on off FREEZE Turns Freeze on off Controls the magnify setting MAGNIFY In some input signal sources it might stop Magnify even though it does not reach to maximum setting value MAGNIFY POSITION V Adjusts the vertical magnify position MAGNIFY POSITION H Adjusts the horizontal magnify position TEMPLATE Turns template on off SHADE Turns the lens shade on closed off opened ZOOM Adjusts the zoom setting FOCUS Adjusts the focus setting LENS SHIFT V Adjusts the vertical lens shift LENS SHIFT H Adjusts the horizontal lens shift LENS MEMORY Saves Loads or Clears the lens memory data PbyP Turns the PbyP mode on off PbyP LEFT SOURCE Selects the PbyP left side area signal source PbyP RIGHT SOURCE Selects the PbyP right side area signal source PbyP MAIN AREA Selects the PbyP main area posotion MY IMAGE Selects MY IMAGE data MY IMAGE DELETE Deletes MY IMAGE data continued on next page Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 33 3 1 Projector Web Control Projector Control continued Item Description PICTURE BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the brightness setting CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast setting GAMMA Selects the gamma setting COLOR TEMP Selects the color temperature setting COLOR Adjusts the color setting TINT Adjusts the tint setting SHARPNESS Adjusts the sharpness setting ACTIVE IRIS Selects the active iris setting MYMEMORY S
142. be executed Power Configures the parameters for power control Input Source Configures the parameters for input switching My Image Configures the parameters for My Image data display L450 Messenger Configures the parameters for Messenger data display L451 Slideshow Configures the Start Stop parameters for the Slideshow Click the Register button to add new commands to the schedule list Click the Delete button to delete commands from the schedule list Click the Reset button to delete all commands and reset the schedule settings from the schedule list 28 3 1 Projector Web Control Schedule Settings continued NOTE After the projector is moved check the date and time set for the projector before configuring the schedules e The internal clock s time may not remain accurate Using SNTP is recommended to maintain accurate time e Events My Image and Messenger will not be executed appropriately but result in schedule execution error status in case lamp does not light or and display data are not stored in the projector at the scheduled event execution time e Events Input Source and My Image will not be executed if security feature is enabled and the projector is locked due to the feature e Certain error state in the projector Such as temperature error lamp error will prevent the projector from appropriate execution of scheduled functions events e If no USB mem
143. becomes invalid when the a H display mode is changed to Multi aa a PC mode regardless the setting meas on the computers 1 For details refer to the manual for LiveViewer MULTI PC MODE continued Selecting this item displays the user name This function helps you identify from which computer the DISPLAY current image is sent USER NAME You can set a user name for each computer on LiveViwer For details refer to the manual for LiveViewer Executing this item restarts and initializes the network functions Choose the NETWORK RESTART EXECUTE using the button gt SERVICE SERVICE Network will be once cut off when choose restart If DHCP is selected on IP address may be changed After selecting NETWORK RESTART EXECUTE NETWORK menu may not be controlled approx 30 seconds 86 Ss CUR MONU This projector is equipped with security functions From the SECURITY menu items shown in the table below can be performed To use SECURITY menu User registration is required before using the security functions Enter to the SECURITY menu 1 Press the gt button The ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed 2 Use the A W lt gt buttons to enter the registered password The SARA factory default password is as follows ENTER PASSWORD CP X8150 CP X8160 3605 CP WX8240 CP WX8255 2005 eR CAN 0000 CP SX8350 2105 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 3705 This password can be changed below Move the cursor t
144. bols can be used HS amp 5 lt gt h and space Particular projector name is pre assigned by default Projector Name Configures the location to be referred to when using SNMP The length of the sysLocation can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Only numbers 0 9 and alphabet a z A Z can be used sysLocation SNMP Configures the contact information to be referred to when using SNMP sysContact SNMP The length of the sysContact can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Only numbers 0 9 and alphabet a z A Z can be used Configures the AMX Device Discovery setting to detect the AMX D D projector from the controllers of AMX connected to the same AMX Device network For the details of AMX Device Discovery visit the Discovery AMX web site URL http Awww amx com as of Feb 2012 continued on next page 19 3 1 Projector Web Control Network Settings continued ltem scription O OO SO Wireless Setup Configures the wireless LAN settings Mode IP Configuration Select Ad Hoc or Infrastructure Configures network settings DHCP ON Enables DHCP DHCP OFF IP Address Disables DHCP Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled Subnet Mask Configures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled Default Gateway Configures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled DNS Server Address Encryptio
145. bs Q Put the filter unit back into the projector continued on next page Cleaning and replacing the air filter continued 1 0 Put the filter cover back into the place 1 1 Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the FILTER TIME using the A cursor buttons then press the gt cursor or the ENTER the RESET button A dialog will appear 3 Press the cursor button to select the OK on the dialog It performs resetting the filter time AWARNING P gt Before taking care of the air filter make sure the power cable is not plugged in then allow the projector to cool sufficiently gt Use only the air filter of the specified type Do not use the projector without the air filter or the filter cover It could result in a fire or malfunction to the projector gt Clean the air filter periodically If the air filter becomes clogged by dust or the like internal temperatures rise and could cause a fire a burn or malfunction to the projector NOTE Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter for a suitable indication about the air filter e The projector may display the message such as the CHECK THE AIR FLOW or turn off the projector to prevent the internal heat level rising 16 Using the CD manual The other manuals for this product are written into the
146. button on the control panel The mechanical lens shade closes and the screen turns to black The SHADE indicator on the projector blinks in yellow while the shade is closed To open the shade and restore the screen press the SHADE button again NOTE The projector will turn off automatically when the time set up by the SHADE TIMER passes M66 e When turning off the power by the normal procedure the lens shade opens automatically If AC power supply is disconnected while opening or closing the lens shade the moving of the lens shade stops However the next time the projector is turned on the lens shade opens again automatically 36 PbyP Picture by Picture lt Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 gt The PbyP is a function for displaying two different picture signals on a screen that is split into main and sub areas for each signal PbyP button L Normal mode PbyP mode Press the PbyP button on the remote control This acctivates the PbyP mode The screen displayed before the PbyP button was pressed will be displayed as the main area Most of operations are effective for the main area only Only outputs the audio input signal paired with the picture input signal for the main area To quit the PbyP mode press the PbyP button again NOTE If the LAN or USB TYPE A B port is selected when the PbyP button is pressed input from other port is displayed on the main
147. ck x5 lt Computer signal gt e Video signal RGB separate Analog 0 7Vp p 75Q terminated positive e H V sync signal TTL level positive negative e Composite sync signal TTL level lt Component video signal gt e Video signal Y with composite sync Analog 1 0 0 1Vp p 75Q terminated Cb Pb Analog 0 7 0 1Vp p 75Q terminated Cr Pr Analog 0 740 1Vp p 750 terminated e System 480i 60 480p 60 576i 50 720p 50 60 1080i 50 60 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI connector Satta e Audio signal Linear PCM Sampling rate 32 44 1 48 kHz 1 T M D S Data2 8 T M D S Data0 Shield 15 SCL 2 TM D S Data2 Shield 9 TM D S Datao 16 SDA ee pa pS oe NE 14 T M D S DataO Reserved N C on device USBTYPEA f DC n 30l E SS se g ro TN M P N k VIDEO AvDIOIN3 R EKE COMPUTER IN 2 GN B Cb Pb R Cr Pr v T LT OUT Pe CONTROL Se L COMPONENT Y Cb Pb Cr Pr RCA jack x3 e Component video signal Analog Y with composite sync 1 0 0 1Vp p 75Q terminated Cb Pb 0 7 0 1Vp p 75Q terminated Cr Pr 0 740 1Vp p 750 terminated e System 480i 60 480p 60 576i 50 720p 50 60 1080i 50 60 1080p 50 60 S VIDEO Bs Mini DIN 4pin jack oc E e S video signal Analog Brightness signal with composite sync 1 0 40 1Vp p 75Q terminated Color si
148. code box is displayed This function will activate only when the projector is started after AC power is turned off e Please do not forget your PIN code 2 Turning off the PIN LOCK 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the PIN LOCK on off menu 2 2 Use the A V buttons to select OFF and the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed Enter the registered PIN code to turn the PIN LOCK function off If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times the projector will turn off 3 If you have forgotten your PIN code 3 1 While the Enter PIN code box is displayed press and hold the RESET button for three seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the button on the projector The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed sapere e If there is no key input for about 5 minutes while the Inquiring Code is displayed the 01 2345 6789 projector will turn off 3 2 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your PIN code will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed continued on next page 89 ltem scription O If this function is set to ON and the vertical angle of the projector or the INSTALLATION setting is different from the previous recorded setting the TRANSITION DETECTOR ON alarm will be displayed and the input r signal will not be displayed ES e To display the signal again set this function OFF e After about 5 minutes of displaying the TRANSITION DETEC
149. ction The LiveViewer supports very quick and simple connection to the network When making use of the network function it is recommended that you install the LiveViewer on your computer For details refer to the manual for LiveViewer In case you don t want to use the LiveViewer or you cannot use it by some reason proceed to the manual setting the item 1 3 for the wired LAN 47 and the item 1 4 for the wireless LAN L11 1 3 Manual network connection setting Wired LAN This section explains how to set it up manually 1 3 1 Equipments connection Connect the projector and a computer with a LAN cable Before connecting with an existing network contact the network administrator Next check the following computer settings 1 3 2 Network settings This is the explanation of network connection settings for Windows 7 and Internet Explorer 1 Log on to Windows 7 as administrator authority Administrator authority is the account which can access to all functions 2 Open Control Panel from Start menu 3 Open View network status and tasks in Network and Internet With the icons in the Control Panel window displayed click Network and Sharing Center 4 Click Change adapter settings in the menu on the left side of the Network and Sharing Center window continued on next page 1 3 Manual network connection setting Wired LAN continued 5 Right click Loc
150. ctor is not in a stable position when ON is selected 2 Turning off the TRANSITION DETECTOR 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu 2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large Enter the registered Ba password and the screen will return to the Inquiring Code 012056709 TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu If an incorrect password is input the menu will ENTER PASSWORD box close If necessary repeat the process from 2 1 arge 3 If you have forgotten your password 3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the TRANSITION DETECTOR on off menu 3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box 3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed SeT EN DETECTOR D Tha praeotor haa Geer ireratered oe prai ii piia HOTE HEW PASSWORD pagg 90 continued on next page ltem scription The MY TEXT PASSWORD function can prevent the MY TEXT from being overwritten When the password is set for the MY TEXT e The MY TEXT DISPLAY menu will be unavailable which can prohibit changing the DISPLAY setting e The MY TEXT WRITING menu will be unavailable which can prevent the MY TEXT from being overwritten 1 Turning on the MY TEXT PASSWORD 1 1 Use the A buttons on the SECURITY Menu to emesmen select the MY TEXT PASSWORD and p
151. ctor usage time is the total lamp time from the projector is manufactured It is not reset by using LAMP TIME in the OPTION menu 67 e lf the A V buttons are pressed while the usage time is displayed the usage time switches to the past one when an error occurred Log number O To display error history Press the A button to display previous error log If a warning has been displayed the first previous error log is the present error currently occurring The Status Monitor displays the log number occurred error the f PREVIOUS PE VEGERSERRS AC240V JA C Error supplied voltage and peripheral temperature Error log example at that time Press the gt button to display i i the usage time when each error occurred Use the A buttons to switch the log q Errorlogi P lt Coney a The display switches with the lt gt Se a buttons at each log Up to 10 error A A_ logs including the present one can be s First display gt lt ean gt lt displayed T TE Voom A A error log10 STM Y Wunu Y nnn T 4 Error log10 gt lt Jsage time a NOTE The Status Monitor and its backlight returns to the first state before the FUNCTION or ENTER button was pressed when any button except cursor buttons is pressed or after about 30 seconds without button operation e If no error or less than 10 errors have occurred NO DATA is displayed
152. d NOTE As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection 66 7 5 Crestron RoomView Crestron RoomView is a multi user resource management program provided by Crestron Electronics Inc It is an application for managing and controlling the projector and other AV devices collectively For details of Crestron RoomView refer to the Crestron website URL http www crestron com as of Feb 2012 The following communication interfaces can be used to manage the entire facility 1 Crestron RoomView Express Crestron RoomView Server Edition RoomView Express and RoomView Server Edition are software provided by Crestron Electronics Inc They are used for managing all the AV devices and are also able to communicate with the help desk as well as send out alert messages For details of the software refer to the following website URL http www crestron com getroomview as of Feb 2012 2 Crestron e Control Crestron e Control is a system controller that can be operated via a web browser 142 67 8 LOL 0 XS nKorond Tare Problem Can t communicate Likely Cause Weak radio signal Things to Check e Bring the computer and projector closer together e Radio waves won t go through concrete and metal steel doors etc Reference Page Number Cannot communicate due to configure wireless encryption sett
153. d if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS This equipment complies with the requirements of FCC Federal Communication Commission equipment provided that the following conditions are met Some cables have to be used with the core set Use the accessory cable or a designated type cable for the connection For cables that have a core only at one end connect the core to the projector CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment For the Customers in CANADA NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Warranty And After Service Unless seen any abnormal operations mentioned with the first paragra
154. d Mode 2 HIGH If the remote control does not function properly attempt to change the signal frequency In order to set the Mode please keep pressing the combination of two buttons listed below simultaneously for about 3 seconds 1 Set to Mode 1 NORMAL AV MUTE and ZOOM buttons 2 Set to Mode 2 HIGH F5 and KEYSTONE buttons Please remember that the REMOTE FREQ in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu 471 of the projector to be controlled should be set to the same mode as the remote control 1 AV MUTE button zo ZOOM button 2 F5 button KEYSTONE KEYSTON E button ajel About the remote control signal The remote control works with the projector s remote sensor This projector has two remote sensors on the front and back sides The sensors can sense signals within the following range 60 degrees 30 degrees to the left and right of the sensor within 3 meters about approx NOTE You can deactivate one of the sensors using the REMOTE RECEIV item in the SERVICE menu of the OPTION menu 471 e The remote control signal reflected in the screen or the like may be available If it is difficult to send the signal to the sensor directly attempt to make the signal reflect e The remote control uses infrared light to send signals to the projector Class 1 LED so be sure to use the remote control in an area free from obstacles that could block t
155. d images v Saving and displaying drawn images You can save images with pictures or text drawn on them to a USB memory device and then retrieve the saved images and display them again later v Use as a simple mouse The Hitachi Pen tablet and USB mouse can be used in place of the mouse of a computer connected to the projector NOTE Authorization by the copyright owner s is required pursuant to including visual images if such works are copyrighted works e This drawing function may not work depending on the image signal e A USB storage device is necessary to save data In addition if the projector only has one available USB TYPE A port a USB hub is needed e Copyright protected images cannot be saved e To use simple mouse function a USB cable is required to connect the computer and the projector e Some pen tablets and USB mice may not operate properly 104 Drawing function continued Connecting the Devices Connect the Hitachi Pen tablet or USB mouse to the USB TYPE A port on the projector To save an image that has been drawn a USB storage device must also be connected to a USB TYPE A port of the projector If the projector only has one availabe USB TYPE A port use a USB hub to connect both devices In order to use the simple mouse function connect the USB TYPE B port of the projector with a USB A port of the computer with a USB cable USB storage device YM Hitachi USB hub Ex
156. d intake vent are inside Elevator feet x2 2128 Elevator buttons x2 428 Remote sensors x2 L418 71 Lens Lens cover Indicators Q5 0 1 2 Intake vents Control panel G25 Status Monitor G20 lt Only for CP X8160 CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 gt 13 AC IN AC inlet 216 14 Exhaust vents 15 Ports 05 16 Security bar L15 17 Security slot L15 18 Grip Lbelow 19 Safety bar 4115 AWARNING PDo not open or remove any portion of the product unless the manuals direct it gt Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions Grip gt Do not apply a shock or pressure to this product Place bs eve your hands on the grip on the bottom of the projector when carrying the projector Remove all the attachments including Hi the power cord and cables from the projector when carrying i the projector ae gt Do not look into the lens and the openings on the projector while the lamp is on ACAUTION PDo not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just after use since it is too hot gt Do not attach anything onto the lens except the lens cover of this projector because it could damage the lens such as melting the lens continued on next page 4 Part names continued Control panel and Indicators 1 STANDBYION button
157. d to an extremely low level Adjust BRIGHTNESS and or CONTRAST settings to a higher level using the menu function Pictures appear The projector is operating in Eco mode dark Set ECO MODE to NORMAL and set AUTO ECO MODE to OFF in the SETUP menu The lamp is approaching the end of its product lifetime 113 114 Replace the lamp The lens cover is attached 4 Remove the lens cover Either the focus and or horizontal phase settings are not properly adjusted Adjust the focus using the FOCUS buttons and or H PHASE using the menu function Pictures appear blurry The lens is dirty or misty Clean the lens referring to the section Caring for the lens continued on next page 125 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Reference Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect When the projector is operating in Eco mode flickering may appear on screen Set ECO MODE to NORMAL and set AUTO ECO Some kind MODE to OFF in the SETUP menu Peete The OVER SCAN ratio is too big 48 Such as Adjust OVER SCAN in the IMAGE menu smaller flickering or Excessive VIDEO NR 50 a Change the setting of VIDEO NR in the INPUT menu The FRAME LOCK function cannot work on the current input signal Set FRAME LOCK in the INPUT menu to OFF The sound When LAN USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B port is or image selected some parts of the output may be missing is unstable due to signa
158. dows XP Home Windows XP Professional Windows Vista Home Basic Windows Vista Home Premium Windows Vista Business Windows Vista Ultimate Windows Vista Enterprise Windows 7 Starter Computer Windows 7 Home Basic application s system Windows 7 Home Premium requirements Windows 7 Professional Windows 7 Ultimate Windows 7 Enterprise CPU Pentium 4 2 8 GHz or higher Graphic card 16 bit XGA or higher Memory 512 MB or higher Hard disk space 100 MB or higher Web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher CD ROM DVD ROM drive USB wireless adapter Gemtek USB Link11n Security 69 lODEN EMm ClMETESEIIES SETAC If a problem occurs with the equipment please read 8 Troubleshooting L468 section first and review all suggested check points After that please contact your dealer or service company if you still have the problem They will tell you what warranty condition is applied 70 Projector CP X8150 CP X8160 CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 User s Manual detailed Instant Stack Guide Thank you for purchasing this product Features This projector can be used with another projector of the same model to project an image on the same screen using the Instant Stack feature The two projectors can be operated simultaneously to make the image brighter Moreover if you connect two projectors with RS 232C cross over cable it turns to a kind of intellectual stacking system Th
159. draw a line 2 Pen color Selects the Color of the line drawn by the Pencil Ss Specifies Black D Specifies Red D Specifies Blue 3 Pen size Selects the Thickness of the line drawn by the Pencil Specifies 1 dot Specifies 3 dot Specifies 5 dot continued on next page 106 Drawing function continued 4 Eraser Switches the electronic pen function to that of an eraser and specifies its size The cursor turns into an Eraser _ dragging it erases previously drawn lines Specifies a 12 dot Eraser Specifies a 20 dot Eraser Specifies a 28 dot Eraser 5 Erase Erases all the lines drawn with the pen 6 Projector Operates the projector Ca 3 continued on next page Calls up and display the previous file in the USB storage device from that currently selected This function is available when the projector is displaying a file from a USB storage device Calls up and display the next file in the USB storage device from that currently displayed This function is available when the projector is displaying a file from a USB storage device Displays thumbnails of files recorded on a USB storage device The cursor on the screen turns to an arrow and can select an icon of folder image and moving to upper folder Touching or clicking activates in the same way as the ENTER button of the remote control You can display an image onto the projector screen by touching or clicking its thu
160. e Authentication setting when authentication is required Default setting is Enable When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required Security Settings Network Control 14 Authentication Password Re enter Authentication Password Enter the desired authentication password ConfirmThis setting will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 and Network Control Port2 Port 9715 Default setting is blank Command control settings TCP 23 1 Command format Same as RS 232C communication refer to RS 232C Communicaton command format 2 Response code Error code h shows hexadecimal Four of the response error code used for TCP 23 are the same as RS 232C Communication 1 4 One authentication error reply 5 is added 1 ACK reply 06h Refer to RS 232C communication 12 2 NAK reply 15h Refer to RS 232C communication 412 3 Error reply 1Ch 0000h Refer to RS 232C communication 412 4 Data reply 1Dh xxxxh Refer to RS 232C communication 412 5 Authentication error reply 1Fh 0400h When authentication error occurred the projector returns the error code TCP 9715 1 Command format The commands some datum are added to the head and the end of the ones of TCP 9715 are used Header Data length RS 232C command Check sum Connection ID 0x02 0x0D 13 bytes 1 byte 1 byte Header 02 Fixed Data Length RS 232C command
161. e Do not mix a new battery with used one e Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery e Keep a battery away from children and pets e Do not recharge short circuit solder or disassemble a battery Do not place a battery in a fire or water Keep batteries in a dark cool and dry place e If you observe battery leakage wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes rinse well with water immediately e Obey the local laws on disposing the battery Using the REMOTE ID function Utilize this function to control specific projectors by the remote control assigned the same ID number when you use multiple ID buttons projectors of the same type at the same time Assign an ID number to each projector before using the REMOTE ID item in the SERVICE menu of the OPTION menu 71 Press the ID button with the same ID number 6S9 as assigned to the projector you are going to control The ID E button selected will light for several seconds L NOTE Each time you press any button except ID buttons the ID button of current selected ID number will light e To confirm the projector s current ID press any ID button for 3 seconds Its number will be shown on each screen regardless of set ID of projector Changing the frequency of remote control signal The accessory remote control has the two choices on signal frequency Mode 1 NORMAL an
162. e Download MIB file to download a MIB file NOTE To use the downloaded MIB file specify the file by your SNMP manager 5 Click the Enable check box to open the SNMP Port Set the IP address to send the SNMP trap to when a Failure Warning occurs NOTE A Network Restart is required after the SNMP Port configuration settings have been changed Click Network Restart on the main menu and click the Restart button Then configure the following items 6 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 7 Click the SNMP and set the community name on the screen that is displayed NOTE A Network Restart is required after the Community name has been changed Click Network Restart on the main menu and click the Restart button Then configure the following items 8 Configure the settings for Trap transmission of Failures Warnings Click the Alert Settings on the main menu and select the Failure Warning item to be configured 9 Click the Enable check box to send out the SNMP trap for Failures Warnings Clear the Enable check box when SNMP trap transmission is not required 10 Click the Apply button to save the settings 58 7 3 Event Scheduling The scheduling function enables to setup scheduled events including power on power off It enables to be self management projector a a a NOTE You can schedule the following control events Power Input Source My Image Messenger Slideshow
163. e ndert werden Der Hersteller bernimmt keine Verantwortung f r etwaige in diesem Handbuch enthaltene Fehler Die Vervielf ltigung bertragung oder Verwendung dieses Dokuments oder dessen Inhalts ist ohne ausdr ckliche schriftliche Genehmigung nicht gestattet NOTA La informaci n de este manual puede sufrir modificaciones sin previo aviso El fabricante no asume ninguna responsabilidad por los errores que puedan aparecer en este manual No est permitida la reproducci n transmisi n o utilizaci n de este documento ni de su contenido sin autorizaci n expresa por escrito NOTA Le informazioni riportate in questo manuale sono soggette a modifica senza preavviso e Il produttore declina qualsiasi responsabilit per eventuali errori che potrebbero comparire nel presente manuale E vietata la riproduzione la trasmissione o l utilizzo del presente documento o del suo contenuto senza espressa autorizzazione scritta MERK Informasjonen i denne h ndboken kan endres uten varsel Produsenten p tar seg intet ansvar for eventuelle feil som fremkommer i denne h ndboken Reproduksjon overf ring eller bruk av dette dokumentet eller deler av det er ikke tillatt uten uttrykt skriftlig tillatelse OPMERKING De informatie in deze handleiding kan zonder voorafgaande kennisgeving veranderd worden De fabrikant neemt geen enkele verantwoordelijkheid voor de eventuele fouten in deze handleiding Reproductie overdrach
164. e Sub projector The menu settings for Intellectual Stack are not performed correctly Check the settings of the STACK menu on the Main and Sub projectors To use the Intellectual Stack feature one projector must be set to Main and the other projector must be set to Sub 8 in User s Manual concise Intellectual Stack does not function Signal cables are not connected correctly Check the connection of cables Also check Q10 14 that the cable connection matches with the in Operating port settings in the menu Guide The Main and The RS 232C cable between the Main and Sub projector do Sub projectors is not properly connected not operate in Connect the RS 232C cable properly and synchronization restart the Main projector 8 continued on next page 32 Troubleshooting 7 Troubleshooting continued Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect ae The settings on the projectors are not set for the Intellectual Stack feature Check the following settings on the Main and Sub projectors aan STANDBY MODE in SETUP menu cos function NORMAL COMMUNICATION TYPE under COMMUNICATION in SERVICE menu OFF STACK LOCK in SECURITY menu OFF The remote control is pointed at the Sub The projector projector does not respond When operating in Intellectual Stack only m3 to the remote the Main projector is capable of receiving the control remote control signals Therefore point at the Main projec
165. e application for your computer To edit transfer and display the text data use the application You can download it from the Hitachi web site http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com For information on the necessary settings and operations for the computer and projector refer to the manual for the application NOTE It is possible to store the text data up to 12 in the maximum e Using MY BUTTON that registered MESSENGER can turn the displaying messenger text on off OPTION menu in the Operating Guide e The text file also can be displayed by using schedule function via the web browser Refer to item 7 3 Event Scheduling 159 for the detail e If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time the projector may not be able to process the data correctly 51 Oe NGONO EOS RUNON This projector is equipped with the NETWORK BRIDGE function to perform mutual conversion of a network protocol and a serial interface By making use of the NETWORK BRIDGE function a computer that is connected to the projector via wireless or wired LAN is able to control an external device via RS 232C communication using the projector as a network terminal TCP IP data Protocol change Serial data AOO O a S a a E EN Wired LAN RS 232C poses RS 232C cable DOO oO External device tlh ny 5 il wl mt 6 1 Connecting devices 1 Connect the projector s LAN
166. e projector power cord for 10 minutes before touching the adapter e When using the USB wireless adapter be sure to connect the adapter to the further USB TYPE A port from the LAN port and use the supplied adapter cover L48 ACAUTION PFor a cable with a core at only one end connect the end with the core to the projector That may be required by EMI regulations gt Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to obtain the consent of the administrator of the network gt Do not connect the LAN port to any network that might have the excessive voltage gt The designated USB wireless adapter that is sold as an option is required to use the wireless network function of this projector Before connecting the USB wireless adapter turn off the power of the projector and disconnect the power cord gt Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the thumbnail screen to secure your data NOTE Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in operation unless that is directed in the manual of the device e Some input ports are selectable in the use For details see User s Manual Operating Guide e Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port e If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port use a USB extension cable to connect the USB storage device Fastening the adapter cover When using the USB wir
167. e resolution is changed the arrangement of icons on computer desktop screen may be changed e If one of the AUDIO IN ports is selected or x is selected for USB TYPE B in AUDIO SOURCE of the AUDIO menu E4157 audio sound operation in the Options window will be disabled MM eelioneynkelarers Replacing the lamp A lamp has finite product life Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause the pictures darker or the color tone poor Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended To prepare a new lamp make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number Type number lt CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP WU8440 gt DT01281 Type number lt CP X8160 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8450 gt DT01291 Replacing the lamp 4 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes 2 Prepare a new lamp If the projector is mounted with specified mounting accessories or if the lamp has broken also ask the dealer to replace the lamp In case of replacement by yourself follow the following procedure 3 Loosen the screw marked by arrow of the lamp cover and then slide down and lift the lamp cover to remove it 4 Loosen the 3 screws marked by arrow of the lamp and slowly pull the lamp out by the handles Never loosen any other screws 5 Inse
168. e same network e Do not set the same network address for both wireless and wired LAN e If you are not utilizing SNTP 43 1 8 Date Time Settings in the Network Guide then you must set the DATE AND TIME during the initial installation e The network communication control is disabled while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING Please connect the network communication to the projector after setting the STANDBY MODE to NORMAL L156 ltem scription Selecting this item displays the WIRELESS SETUP menu for the wireless LAN aioe Use the A buttons to select an item IP ADDRESS and the gt or ENTER button on the remote E DEFAULT GATEWAY control to perform the item gt TNE DIFFERENCE Use the A V buttons to select the mode of the network communication system Select according to the settings of your computer ADHOC INFRASTRUCTURE To save the setting press the button e When ADHOC is selected IEEE802 11 n cannot be used e If ADHOC is set to MODE while one of WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK is selected in ENCRYPTION the ENCRYPTION 0478 setting switches to OFF automatically WIRELESS SETUP 76 continued on next page ltem scription Use the A V buttons to turn DHCP on off ON OFF Select OFF when the network does not have DHCP DHCP enabled To save the setting press the gt button pada pe e When the DHCP setting changes to ON it Pr
169. e the projector outdoors or by the window e Do not place anything containing liquid near the projector continued on next page Arrangement continued ACAUTION P gt Place the projector in a cool place with sufficient ventilation The projector may shutdown automatically or may malfunction if its internal temperature is too high Using a damaged projector could result in a fire and an electric shock e Do not place the projector in direct sunlight or near hot objects such as heaters e Do not place the projector where the air from an air conditioner or similar unit will blow on it directly e Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other objects such as walls e Do not place the projector on carpet cushions or bedding e Do not stop up block nor cover the projector s vent holes Do not place anything around the projector that could be sucked in or stuck to the projector s intake vents e Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic fields doing so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction gt Avoid placing the projector in smoky humid or dusty place Placing the projector in such places could cause a fire an electric shock and malfunction of the projector e Do not place the projector near humidifiers Especially for an ultrasonic humidifier chlorine and minerals contained in tap water are atomized and could be deposited in the projector causing image deg
170. e two projectors can work alternately by themselves and once one projector has an accident the other voluntarily starts to work to keep your presentation going These features generically called Instant Stack provide you with the broad use INNOVE Walks nner Various symbols are used in this manual The meanings of these symbols are described below A WARNING This symbol indicates information that if ignored could possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling ACAUTION This symbol indicates information that if ignored could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble J Please refer to the pages written following this symbol NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice e The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual e The reproduction transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent Trademark acknowledgment All the trademarks in this manual are the properties of their respective owners 1 Contents aa 1 Introduction cececeeeeeeeees 3 1 1 Basic information and preparations cccceceeeeeees 3 Istant STACK eae eset tenes rsereeeetecaacteaean 3 Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack 3 Remote control for Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack
171. ector Before connecting the USB wireless adapter turn off the power of the projector and disconnect the power cord Do not use any extension cable or device when connecting the adapter to the projector gt Before removing the USB storage device from the port of the projector be sure to use the REMOVE USB function on the Thumbnail screen to secure your data 1197 gt To connect both the LAN cable and USB device to the projector use only the further USB TYPE A port from the LAN port or a LAN cable that is flat on the side where the plug s wire is visible Otherwise both of them cannot be con nected correctly or the wire may break malfunction NOTE If an oversized USB storage device blocks the LAN port use only the further USB TYPE A port from the LAN port or a USB extension cable to connect the USB storage device 12 continued on next page Connecting with your devices continued VCRIDVD 57 0926 eats 1126 52 ray Disc AUDIO OUT CE NEO z EN pl ayer O 600 2 lt AUDIO OUT CN X REMOTE CONTROL oe NOTE The HDMI ports of this model are compatible with HDCP High band width Digital Content Protection and therefore capable of displaying video signals from HDCP compatible DVD players or the like The HDMI ports support the following signals Video signal 480i 60 480p 60 576i 50 576p 50 720p 50 60 1080i
172. ector uses a liquid crystal display panel The display condition can differ from the display of CRT e Do not use a polarized screen It can cause red image Turn the power on off in right order To prevent any trouble turn on off the projector in right order mentioned below unless specifying e Power on the projector before the computer or video tape recorder e Power off the projector after the computer or video tape recorder Take care not to fatigue your eyes Rest the eyes periodically Set the sound volume at a suitable level to avoid bothering other people e It is better to keep the volume level low and close the windows at night to protect the neighborhood environment Connecting with notebook computer When connecting with notebook computer set to valid the RGB external image output setting CRT display or simultaneous display of LCD and CRT Please read instruction manual of the notebook for more information Lamp A WARNING AN A HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp The lamp can break with_a loud bang or burn out if jolted or scratched handled while hot or worn over time Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them In addition when the bulb bursts it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the lamp housing and for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector s vent holes
173. ector while the projector is receiving AC power Do not use any extension cable or device when connecting the adapter to the projector Security precautions when using wireless LAN It is recommended that security settings such as SSID and ENCRYPTION are specified when using wireless LAN communication If the security settings are not specified the contents may be intercepted or it may cause unauthorized access to the system For details on wireless LAN security settings refer to 3 1 Projector Web Control or LAINETWORK menu in the Operating Guide ACAUTION PThe optional IEEE802 11b g n USB wireless adapter uses the 2 4GHz radio frequency band You do not need a radio license to use the adapter but you should be aware of the following e DO NOT USE NEAR THE FOLLOWING e Microwave ovens e Industrial scientific or medical devices e Designated low power radio stations e Premises radio stations Using the USB wireless adapter near the above may cause radio interference which would result in a decrease in transmission speed or interruption and even lead to malfunctioning of devices such as pacemakers e Depending on the location where the USB wireless adapter is used radio wave interference may occur which may result in a decrease in transmission speed or interruption in communication In particular please be aware that using the USB wireless adapter at locations where there is reinforced steel other types of metals or concrete is likely
174. ecute BE EF 03 06 00 EC C7 06 00 47 70 0000 GAIN G Reset Beate eero oo ec cr os oo 47 70 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 8C F5 02 00 B3 30 00 00 COLOR TEMP Execute BE EF 03 06 00 F8 C4 06 00 48 70 00 00 GAIN B Reset execute BE EF o 06 oo Fe ca 00 00 487o 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 04 F5 02 00 B5 30 00 00 ee COLOR TEMP Execute BE EF 03 06 00 40 C5 06 00 4A 70 00 00 OFFSET R Reset execute BE EF 09 06 00 40 05 00 00 sazo 00 00 Get BE EF 03 06 00 40 F5 02 00 B6 30 00 00 a COLOR TEMP Execute BE EF 03 06 00 BC C4 06 00 4B 70 00 00 OFFSET G Reset eae ae F os oso ac cx o 48 70 00 00 Get BEEF 03 06 00 BC F4 02 00 B7 30 00 00 ee COLOR TEMP OFFSET B Reset continued on next page 23 CommandData Data Nam ration T Header CRC aaa Header oe Action Type eating code COLOR TINT SHARPNESS Doou BE EF o6 00 c4 Do 06 00 09 70 00 00 Set AAE AN ce BEEF 03 06 00 38 22 02 00 0433 0000 Ot eeEF os 06 00 OE D7 01 00 14 20 0000 MY MEMORY s 2 __ BE EF 03 06 00 9E D6 01 00 14 20 0100 me 3 Ss d BE EF 03 06 00 GE DG 01 00 14 20 0200 4 BEEF os 06 00 FE D7 01 00 14 20 0300 _ ot S d BE EF 03 06 00 F2 D6 01 00 1520 0000 MY MEMORY co Save 3 BEEF 03 0600 92 D7 01 00 1520 0200
175. eless adapter be sure to connect the adapter to the further USB TYPE A port from the LAN port and use the supplied adapter cover 1 Loosen the screw marked with triangle on the bottom left of the USB TYPE A ports 2 Insert the tab of the cover into the hole at the upper right of the USB TYPE A ports in the direction of the arrow 3 Align the screw holes on the projector and the cover Then insert the screw removed from the projector into the hole and 3 tighten the screw AAWARNING P Keep small parts away from children and pets Take care not to put in the mouth gt Heat may build up in the USB wireless adapter to avoid possible burns disconnect the projector power cord for 10 minutes before touching the adapter Connecting power supply 1 Put the connector of the power cord into the AC IN AC inlet of the projector 2 Firmly plug the power cord s plug into the outlet In a couple of seconds after the power supply connection the POWER indicator will light up in steady orange Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON function activated the connection of the power supply make the projector turn on AWARNING P Do not connect the projector to a power supply while no lens unit is attached to it gt Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord as incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and or electrical shock e Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand e
176. ell to highlight the port to which the signal cable is COMPONENT connected and press the button to complete iam the setting NOTE If FOLLOW MAIN UNIT is selected selecting the input source on either the Main or Sub projector will automatically set the other projector to the Same source e lf FOLLOW MAIN UNIT is selected LAN USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B cannot be selected e When FOLLOW MAIN UNIT is selected if any button to select an input port on the remote control or the INPUT button on the Main projector is pressed the dialog for selecting the input source will be displayed 29 6 Restrictions on Schedule function This model supports the Schedule function on the Projector Web Control feature Network Guide 3 1 7 Schedule Settings There are some restrictions on the functions when Intellectual Stack with RS 232C connection is used But for Simple Stack without an RS 232C connection there is no restriction on the functions Regardless of whether Intellectual Stack or Simple Stack is used take note of the Schedule settings before using the Stack function Unexpected setting changes may occur when using the Stack function Refer to the following for the restrictions concerning Intellectual Stack If you are using Simple Stack skip this chapter Restrictions on the Main projector LAMP MODE DUAL Functions DUAL AELE RA AIE ALTERNATE Power status Power Off E LAMP MODE DUAL Functions
177. ens Help Desk window 1148 NOTE If Crestron e Control in the Network Settings 1271 is set to Disable Crestron e Control cannot be used to operate the projector Enable Crestron e Control and close the web browser Next restart the web browser followed by entering the projector s IP address e Only English is supported on Crestron e Control e If the connection is terminated the Loading screen will appear Check the connection between the projector and the computer then return or refresh the Web page 3 2 Crestron e Contro continued 3 2 1 Main window eee O of i Computer in 1 ez Banna a You can operate the basic controls of the projector on this screen NOTE If the projector is in the standby mode only the Power button can be operated 1 Click a button and operate as follows Button escription Power Turns the power on off Vol Vol Adjusts the volume setting Mute Turns the audio mute on off 2 Sources List You can click a button to switch the input channel The cursor will move according to the currently selected input port Button Description _ _ Computer in1 Selects input from COMPUTER IN1 port computer in2 Selects input from COMPUTER IN2 port Selects input from LAN port Te Type A Selects input from USB TYPE A ports USB Type B Selects input from USB TYPE B port HDMI 1 Selects input from HDMI 1 port HDMI 2 Selects input
178. eply to the alert message via a chat format Input a message in the box below the alert message and click the Send button NOTE For details of Emergency Alert refer to the manual of Crestron RoomView Express e The alert message from Crestron RoomView is displayed on the screen of the projector in a way similar to the real time text of the Messenger function 151 If another real time text is currently being displayed it will be overwritten by the alert message However if the priority of the real time text is set to high it will not be overwritten by the alert message and the latter will not appear on the screen of the projector For details refer to the manual for the application of the Messenger 49 A MMIMELC O im InKextKoyn The projector can display still images that are transferred via the network MY IMAGE transmission requires an exclusive application for your computer Use the application to transfer the image data It can be downloaded from the Hitachi web site http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com For information on the necessary settings and operations for the computer and projector refer to the manual for the application To display the transferred image select the MY IMAGE item in the NETWORK menu For more information please see the description of the MY IMAGE item of the NETWORK menu NETWORK menu in the Operating Guide NOTE It is possible t
179. er In addition the extra air filter is attached to inner side of the filter cover of CP X8160 CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 If one of the filters is damaged or heavily soiled replace whole g filter set with a new one Request for a filter set with the following type number from your dealer when purchasing a new one Type number lt CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 gt MU06642 Type number lt CP X8160 CP WX8255 CP WU8450 gt UX38241 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power 2 cord Allow the projector to sufficiently cool down Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter cover Pick and pull up the filter cover knobs to take it off Press up slightly the bottom side knobs to unlock the bottom side of the filter unit Pull the center knob to take the filter unit off jl Aa an mi we un i Hy RON ZS e S 5 Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent Filter cover of the projector and the outer side of the knobs Extra filter unit air filter 6 The filter unit consists of two parts Press lt Only for CP X8160 CP WX8240 down around the interlocking parts to and CP WU8450 gt unlock then separate the two parts 7 Use a vacuum cleaner for the inner side 4 5 Filt it of each part of the filter unit to clean them it ne up If the filters are damaged or heavily L soiled replace them with the new ones 8 Combine the two parts to reassemble the Filter unit filter unit kno
180. esidential area is likely to case harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense INSTRUCTIONS TO USERS Some cables have to be used with the core set Use the accessory cable or a designated type cable for the connection For cables that have a core only at one end connect the core to the projector CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Regulatory notices continued About Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Equipment Directive 2002 96 EC WEEE The mark indicates the requirement NOT to dispose the equipment including any spent or discarded batteries or accumulators as unsorted municipal waste but use the return and collection systems available If the batteries or accumulators included with this equipment display the chemical symbol Hg Cd or Pb then it means that the battery has a heavy metal content of more than 0 0005 Mercury or more than 0 002 Cadmium or more than 0 004 Lead Contents of package 4 Your projector should come with the items 1 E K The mark is in compliance with the Waste Electrical and Electronic shown below Check that all the items are included Require of your dealer immediately if any items are missing 1 Remote control with two AA batteries 2 Power cord 3 Computer cable 4 Lens cove
181. everal seconds to read and display an image file if it is stored in very deep layer directory or if so many files are stored in the same directory Selects the mode of Slideshow PLAY MODE ONE TIME Play the Slideshow one time ENDLESS Play the Slideshow endless NOTE The settings of the Slideshow are saved to the playlist txt file that is stored in the storage media If the file is not existed it is generated automatically e The settings for the START STOP INTERVAL and PLAY MODE are saved to the Playlist e If the storage media is under the write protection or the playlist txt is the read only type file it is impossible to change the settings of the Slideshow 102 PC LESS Presentation continued Playlist The Playlist is a DOS format text file which decides the order of displayed still image files in the Thumbnail mode or Slideshow The playlist file name is playlist txt and it can be edited on a computer It is created in the folder that contains the selected image files when the PC LESS Presentation is started or the Slideshow is configured Example of playlist txt files START setting STOP setting INTERVAL setting PLAY MODE setting img001 jpg img002 jpg 600 img003 jpg 700 rot1 img004 jpg SKIP img005 jpg 1000 rot2 SKIP The playlist txt file contains the following information Each piece of information requires to be separated by
182. eystone distortion correction function on off AUTO POWER OFF SHADE TIMER DIRECT POWER ON Turns the direct power on function on off Configures the timer to shut off the projector when no signal is detected Selects the shade timer setting USB TYPE B MY BUTTON 1 Selects the USB TYPE B setting Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON 1 button on the included remote control MY BUTTON 2 Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON 2 button on the included remote control MY BUTTON 3 Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON 3 button on the included remote control MY BUTTON 4 continued on next page Assigns the functions for the MY BUTTON 4 button on the included remote control 37 3 1 Projector Web Control Projector Control continued Item Description OPTION continued REMOTE RECEIV FRONT Turns the remote receiv front function on off ee eater Turns the remote receiv rear function on off REAR REMOTE FREQ Turns the remote control signal frequency nomal function on NORMAL off REMOTE FREQ Turns the remote control signal frequency high function on HIGH off REMOTE ID Selects Remote ID setting zh This item is performed when the button is clicked without showing another confirmation message Click the Quit Presenter Mode Item Description SERVICE Quit Presenter Mode Quit compulsorily from the Presenter mode
183. fixed CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 16 10 fixed 27 Adjusting the projector s elevator When the place to put the projector is slightly uneven to the left or right use the elevator feet to place the projector horizontally Using the feet can also tilt the projector in order to project at a suitable angle to the screen elevating the front side of the projector within 9 degrees This projector has 2 elevator feet and 2 elevator buttons An elevator foot is adjustable while pushing the elevator button on the same side as it 4 Holding the projector push the elevator buttons to a loose the elevator feet push the elevator Position the front side of the projector to the desired S E height Release the elevator buttons in order to lock the elevator feet After making sure that the elevator feet are locked put the projector down gently If necessary the elevator feet can be manually PEN A i twisted to make more precise adjustments Hold the adjust twist projector when twisting the feet the foot a E Mi 28 Adjusting the lens E LENS SHIFT button Adjusting the zoom and focus F ZOOM buttons The ZOOM or FOCUS dialog will appear when you JE press any of the buttons from ZOOM ZOOM sa CIC ZOOM FOCUS and FOCUS a eee Use the ZOOM buttons on the remote TELLEL control or ZOOM button and lt gt cursor buttons on the pro
184. for about 30 seconds please make note of the password during this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or button on the MyScreen projector will return to MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu PASSWORD When a password is set for MyScreen e The MyScreen registration function and menu will be unavailable e The MyScreen Lock menu will be unavailable e The START UP setting will be locked on MyScreen and the menu will be unavailable Turning the MyScreen PASSWORD off will allow normal operation of these functions e Please do not forget your MyScreen PASSWORD 2 Turning off the MyScreen PASSWORD 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off IET E Wy Screen PASSWORD 2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER ee PASSWORD box large Enter the registered mending Code OT AS TOO password and the screen will return to the ono Ls MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu ENTER PASSWORD box If an incorrect PASSWORD is input the menu will darge close If necessary repeat the process from 2 1 3 If you have forgotten your password 3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MyScreen PASSWORD on off menu 3 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed inside the box 3 3 Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed E MyScrean PASSWORD HOTE NEW PASSWORD po
185. from HDMI 2 port Component Selects input from COMPONENT port S Video Selects input from S VIDEO port Video Selects input from VIDEO port 43 3 2 Crestron e Controf Main window continued 3 Click a button and operate as follows To show the hidden buttons click the lt gt icons at the left and right ends Button escription Freeze Turns Freeze on off Contrast Adjusts the contrast setting Brightness Adjusts the brightness setting Color Adjusts the color setting Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness setting Controls the magnification setting using the buttons Use the A V lt gt buttons to move to the area you want to magnify Performs the automatic adjustment Turns the BLANK screen on off 4 Click the button and operate in the same way as the bundled remote control Button Description _ ___ Assigned the same operation as MENU button Assigned the same operation as ENTER button Assigned the same operation as RESET button Assigned the same operation as A button Assigned the same operation as Y button Assigned the same operation as lt button So Assigned the same operation as button 44 3 2 Crestron e Control continued 3 2 2 Tools window 2 1 4 3 5 Configures the settings between the projector and Crestron control system Click the Exit button to return to the Main window NOTE If two byte
186. function 39 Indication in OSD 3 Containing items of each menu 2 EMOA AON Features The projector provides you with the broad use by the following features v v The HDMI ports can support various image equipment which have digital interface to get clearer pictures on a screen The super bright lamp and high quality optical system can fulfill the demands of professional uses Some optional lens units and the wide range of the lens shift feature will give much more chances to install the product wherever you want The lens shade can hide your inside operations and will help your presentation The wealth of I O ports is believed to support any business scene Checking the contents of package Please see the Contents of package section in the User s Manual concise which is a book Your projector should come with the items shown there Require of your dealer immediately if any items are missing NOTE Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment Be sure to use the original packing materials when moving the projector Use special caution for the lens e The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted moved or shaken since a flap to control the air flow inside of the projector has moved Be aware that this is not a failure or malfunction Part names Projector 1 Lamp cover 21113 The lamp unit is inside 2 Speakers x2 25 57 3 Filter cover 1115 The air filter an
187. g continued on next page 88 ltem scription PIN LOCK is a function which prevents the projector from being used unless a registered Code is input 1 Turning on the PIN LOCK 1 1 Use the A F buttons on the SECURITY menu to select PIN LOCK and press the gt button or the ENTER button to display the PIN LOCK on off menu 1 2 Use the A V buttons on the PIN LOCK on a PIN BOX off menu to select ON and the Enter PIN Enter PIN Coda Code box will be displayed 1 3 Input a 4 part PIN code using the A W lt P gt COMPUTER 1 or INPUT button The PIN Code again box will appear Reenter iini the same PIN code This will complete the PIN Pikmin code registration a e If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Enter PIN Code box or the PIN Code again box is displayed the menu will close If necessary repeat the process from 1 1 Afterwards anytime the projector is restarted after AC power is turned off the Enter PIN Code box will be displayed Enter the registered PIN code The projector can be used after entering the registered PIN code If an incorrect PIN code is input the Enter PIN code box will be displayed again al EJ a bel CONPEUTERI gt PIN LOCK If an incorrect PIN code is input 3 times the projector will turn off Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect PIN code is input The projector will also turn off if there is no key input for about 5 minutes while the Enter PIN
188. g off the power BOWER Gaia Press the STANDBYION button on the L projector or the STANDBY button on the remote control The message Power off will appear STANDBY STANDBY button on the screen for about 5 seconds 2 Press the STANDBY ON or STANDBY r m button again while the message z OES H K W MP TEMP POWER g Bj AQA e o m 0 E0 O 0 OUR arga 000 oog mg ago S appears ene The projector lamp will go off and the STANOVA aa POWER indicator will begin blinking in STANDBYI ON button orange Then the POWER indicator will stop blinking and light in steady orange when the lamp cooling is complete 3 Attach the lens cover after the POWER indicator turns to steady orange Do not turn the projector on for about 10 minutes or more after turning it off Also do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on Such operations might cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp AAWARNING P Do not touch around the lamp cover and the exhaust vents during use or just after use since it is too hot gt Remove the power cord for complete separation The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible NOTE Please power off the projector after any connected devices are powered off e This projector has the AUTO POWER OFF function that can make the projector tur
189. gh the lens or openings when the lamp is on The powerful light could adversely affect vision Use special caution in households where children are present Use only the correct power cord and the correct power outlet Incorrect power supply could result in fire or electrical shock e Use only the correct power outlet depending on the indication on the projector and the safety standard e The enclosed power cord must be used depending on the power outlet to be used Be cautious of the power cord connection Incorrect connection of the power cord could result in fire or electrical shock e Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand e Check that the connecting portion of the power cord is clean with no dust before using Use a soft and dry cloth to clean the power plug e Insert the power plug into a power outlet firmly Avoid using a loose unsound outlet or contact failure Be sure to connect with ground wire Connect the ground terminal of AC inlet of this unit with the ground terminal provided at the building using the correct power cord otherwise fire or electric shock can result e Don t take the core of power cord away gt 09 Surely connect the ground wire N WARNING Be careful in handling the light source lamp The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp made of glass The lamp can break with a loud bang or burn out When the bulb bursts it is possible for shards of glass to fly into the la
190. gnal 0 286Vp p NTSC burst 75Q terminated 0 300Vp p PAL SECAM burst 75Q terminated e System NTSC PAL SECAM PAL M PAL N NTSC4 43 PAL 60Hz C color signal Y brightness signal VIDEO RCA jack e Composite video signal Analog 1 0 0 1Vp p 75Q terminator e System NTSC PAL SECAM PAL M PAL N NTSC4 43 PAL 60HZz 6 USB TYPE A DC5V 0 5A fe CS ec CI Gr fuse HDMI HDMI TYPEB 1 2 COMPUTER IN 2 GN B Cb Pb R Cr Pr S VIDEO VIDEO aons 9 a zf AUDIO IN 2 REMOTE CONTROL ee AUDIO IN1 P AUDIO IN2 3 5 stereo mini jack e Analog 500 mVrms 47kQ input impedance AUDIO IN3 L R AUDIO OUT L MR RCA jack x2 RCA jack x2 e Analog 500 mVrms 47kQ input impedance e Analog 500 mVrms 1kQ output impedance CONTROL D sub 9pin plug About the details of RS 232C communication please refer to the next section Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 No connection 4 No connection 7 RTS 2 RD 5 Ground 8 CTS 9 3 mo 6 Nocomnection No connection W X USB TYPE A DC5V S al eS G VEE Wie O Ghee r TOU S VIDEO VIDEO aons 00 CONTROL Cr Pr Cb Pb Y COMPONENT COMPUTER IN 2 GN B Cb Pb R Cr Pr o oo v
191. gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION STACK HOD ca gt STACK ee ee ove STACK menu will appear on screen iii MoOperating Guide OPTION menu 6 Use the A buttons to highlight STACK isda MODE and press the gt button to display the STACK MODE dialog ENEN Highlight MAIN with the A buttons and press the lt button to return to the previous menu 7 Use the A buttons to highlight LAMP Beanie MODE and press the gt button to display ALTERNATE the LAMP MODE dialog SEE TUS ena Highlight DUAL with the A V buttons and press the gt button 8 After pressing the gt button a dialog to ssa citar a gd tacos confirm whether or not to save the setting is YOU WISH TO CHANGE STACK SETTING displayed pa Press the gt button to complete the setting 79 Installation 2 4 Confirming Main and Sub settings Press the MENU button on the remote control for Main Set B 1 3 Main Set B Sub Set A If you press the gt button the dialog closes and the Main Set B menu will appear when MAIN is highlighted If you press the lt button the dialog closes and the menu will disappear NOTE If these dialogs are not displayed on screen check the RS 232C connection M8 and the MAIN or SUB setting in the STACK MODE dialog 074 10 Installation 2 5 Fine adjusting image position To superimpose the images of Main Set B and Sub Set A fine adjust the im age size and position of
192. hards of glass to fly into the lamp housing and for gas containing mercury and dust containing fine particles of glass to escape from the projector s vent holes gt About disposal of a lamp This product contains a mercury lamp do not put itin a trash Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws e For lamp recycling go to www lamprecycle org in the US e For product disposal consult your local government agency or www eiae org in the US or www epsc ca in Canada For more information ask your dealer e If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does unplug the power cord from the outlet and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer Note that shards of glass could damage the projector s internals or cause injury during handling so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself Disconnect If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does the plug ventilate the room well and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine from the particles that come out from the projector s vent holes and not to get nts them into your eyes or mouth Before replacing the lamp turn the projector off and unplug the power cord then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns as well as damaging the lamp e Never unscrew except the appointed marked by an arrow screws e Do not open the lamp cover whi
193. he Apply button to save the settings After configure the time command and parameters click the Register to add the new event 8 Click the Delete button when you want to delete a schedule 4 5 6 T There are three types of scheduling 1 Daily Perform the specified operation at a specified time every day 2 Sunday Saturday Perform the specified operation at the specified time on a specified day of the week 3 Specific date Perform the specified operation on the specified date and time NOTE In standby mode the POWER indicator will flash green for approx 3 seconds when at least 1 Power ON schedule is saved e When the schedule function is used the power cord must be connected to the projector and the outlet The schedule function does not work when the breaker in a room is tripped The power indicator will lights orange or green when the projector is receiving AC power 60 7 3 Event Scheduling continued Date Time Settings 230 The Date Time setting can be adjusted via a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser and select Projector Web Control from the selection window 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Date Time Settings on the main menu and configure each item Refer to item 3 1 8 Date Time Settings 130 for further information
194. he menu on the Thumbnail screen mT Moves to an upper folder Allows you to sort Allows you to sort files and folders as following and folders as Allows you to sort files and folders as following RETURN screen gt cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail a Gotoprevious nextpage SSS Configures and starts the Slideshow A101 and starts the Slideshow Configures and starts the Slideshow A101 RETURN oe gt cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail PLAY Press the cursor button or ENTER to start the Slideshow START Sets the beginning number of the Slideshow STOP Sets the end number of the Slideshow Sets the interval time for displaying still images during the Slideshow It is not recommend to set the interval time very short something INTERVAL like several seconds because it may take more than several seconds to read and display an image file if it is stored in very deep layer directory or if so many files are stored in the same directory Selects the mode of Slideshow PLAY MODE ONE TIME Play the Slideshow one time ENDLESS Play the Slideshow endless INPUT Switches the input port MENU Displays the menu Be sure to use this function before removing USB storage device from the projector After that the projector will not recognize USB storage devices until you insert it again into the USB TYPE A ports REMOVE USB Turns the sound on off for files that contain audio data
195. he projector A A EEE TE The LiveViewer Lite for USB has two options that have different compression rate of JPEG data Transmission speed Speed takes priority over Image quality It makes JPEG compression rate higher The screen on the projector is rewritten quicker because the transferred data is smaller but the image quality is worse Image quality Image quality takes priority over Speed It makes JPEG compression rate lower The screen on the projector is rewritten slower because the transferred data is larger but the image quality is better Keep PC resolution If you remove the check mark from the Keep PC resolution box the screen resolution of your computer will be switched as follows and the display speed may be faster CP X8150 CP X8160 1024 x 768 XGA The other models 1280 x 800 lf your computer does not support the display resolution specified above a smaller resolution that is the largest among the resolutions that are supported by the computer will be selected Sound Turns the sound on off The image quality may deteriorate when you play back audio data transferred together with the image data To give priority to the image quality turn off the sound by selecting the checkbox Display LiveViewer Lite for USB If you want to display the LiveViewer Lite for USB application window on the screen please check the box About The version information of the LiveViewer Lite for USB NOTE When th
196. he remote control s signal to the projector e The remote control may not work correctly if strong light Such as direct sun light or light from an extremely close range such as from an inverter fluorescent lamp shines on the remote sensor of the projector Adjust the position of projector avoiding those lights 18 Using as a simple PC mouse amp keyboard The accessory remote control works as a simple mouse and keyboard of the computer when the i projectors USB TYPE B port and the computer s ES o ned GS a H type A USB port are connected and MOUSE is V it it selected for the USB TYPE B item in the OPTION menu E1167 USB TYPE B 1 PAGE UP key Press PAGE UP button ee 2 PAGE DOWN key Press PAGE DOWN button 3 Mouse left button Press ENTER button 1 4 Move pointer Use the cursor buttons A V lt and gt 2 5 ESC key Press ESC button 6 Mouse right button Press RESET button 7 7 F5 key Press F5 button ff alll al a l e cles gt A S N I I Y 7 I 200 a I Q gt Nr NOTE When the simple mouse amp keyboard function of this product does not work correctly please check the following e When a USB cable connects this projector with a computer having a built in pointing device e g track ball like a laptop PC open BIOS setup menu then select the external mouse and disable the built in pointing
197. he table 21121 AIR AIR FLOW The internal temperature is rising Refer to the description of the message CHECK THE AIR FLOW in the table 21119 COLD There is a possibility that the interior portion has become over cooled Refer to the LAMP and TEMP indicators alternatively blinking in the table 01271 FILTR FILTER It is time to clean the air filter Refer to the LAMP and TEMP indicators simultaneous blinking in the table 01271 example 21 Displaying the log The present setup information and the error history can be displayed on the Status Monitor with button operation NOTE While the projector is warming up button presses are ignored e When the USB TYPE A port is selected use the buttons on the control panel to display the logs The button operation of the Status Monitor on the remote control may be unavailable e The Status Monitor displays nothing or no button presses for the monitor are available while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING E156 e Both of the Status Monitor and the OSD menu cannot be operated at same time When the projector is in a normal condition or dislays one of the warnings of AIR FLOW COLD or FILTER errors press the FUNCTION button on the control panel or press the ENTER button on the remote control for three seconds The backlight of the monitor turns on O To display the
198. icine and can be useful for displaying medical images such as X rays photos This projector is not a medical device and is not compliant to the DICOM standard and neither the projector nor the DICOM SIM mode should be used for medical diagnosis Using the lt gt buttons turns off on the Eco mode ECO MODE See the ECO MODE item in SETUP menu Q455 Pressing the button displays the INSTALLATION dialog INSTALLATION See the INSTALLATION item in SETUP menu E155 Performing this item resets all of the EASY MENU items except the RESET FILTER TIME and LANGUAGE A dialog is displayed for confirmation Selecting the OK using the gt button performs resetting The usage time of the air filter is shown in the menu Performing this item resets the filter time which counts usage time of the air filter pe LME A dialog is displayed for confirmation Selecting the OK using the gt button performs resetting See the FILTER TIME item in OPTION menu B67 Using the lt gt buttons changes the display language LANGUAGE See the LANGUAGE item in SCREEN menu 59 Press the or ENTER button to use the menu of PICTURE ADVANCED MENU IMAGE INPUT SETUP AUDIO SCREEN OPTION NETWORK or SECURITY EXIT Press the lt or ENTER button to finish the OSD menu PICTURE MODE continued 43 KG MU R menu From the PICTURE menu items shown in the table below can be performed Select an item using the A V cursor button
199. if the bulb is not broken e Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed At the lamp replacing make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly Loose screws could result in damage or injury e Use the lamp of the specified type only e If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp If this happens contact your local dealer or a service representative e Handle with care jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst CD during use e Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause it dark not to light up or to burst When the pictures appear dark or when the color tone is poor please replace the lamp as soon as possible Do not use old used lamps this is a cause of breakage Regulatory Notices FCC Statement Warning This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy an
200. igned the same operation as RESET button PAGE UP Assigned the same operation as PAGE UP button PAGE DOWN Assigned the same operation as PAGE DOWN button SLIDESHOW Starts the Slideshow continued on next page 39 3 1 Projector Web Control Remote Control continued NOTE The Web Remote Control does not support repeat function that performs an action while holding a button clicked down e Since the repeat function is not available click the button repeatedly as many times as you require e Even if you hold the button clicked down for a while the Web Remote Control sends your request command one time only Release the button then click it again e When the STANDBY or ON button is pushed a message window comes up to confirm the operation To control the power push OK otherwise push Cancel e The PAGE DOWN and PAGE UP buttons on the Web Remote Control cannot be used as mouse emulation function of the projector 40 3 1 Projector Web Control continued 3 1 12 Projector Status Sa Displays the settings and status of the projector Item Description Error Status Displays the current error status Lamp Time Displays the usage time for the current lamp Filter Time Displays the usage time for the current filter Filter Status Displays the current cleanliness level of the air filter Power Status Displays the current power status Input Status Displays the curren
201. imple Stack NOTE lf the RS 232C cable connecting the two projectors operating in Intellectual Stack is disconnected the projectors will exit from Intellectual Stack and start to operate individually Intellectual Stack will not restart even if the cable is reconnected Follow the procedures below to restart Intellectual Stack 1 Do not operate the projectors for more than 10 seconds after disconnecting the cable to allow the projectors to recognize the disconnection of the cable 2 Turn off both projectors and allow them to cool sufficiently 3 Reconnect the two projectors with the RS 232C cable and turn them on again Intellectual Stack will restart 23 Connecting cables 4 2 Connecting signal cables There are two methods to input image to the Sub projector L78 79 Inputting image from the MONITOR OUT port on Main to Sub Inputting image to Sub and Main individually Inputting image from Main to Sub 1 Connect the MONITOR OUT port on Main to the COMPUTER IN1 port on Sub with a computer cable 2 Connect the image output device to one of the input ports on Main NOTES for Intellectual Stack e COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 can be used as the input port for the Main projector in Intellectual Stack Do not use other ports for image input You can input component signals to COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 Y
202. in fire injury and or pollution of the surrounding environment e When replacing the batteries replace both of the batteries with new batteries of the same type Do not use a new battery with a used battery e Be sure to use only the batteries specified Do not use batteries of different types at the same time Do not mix a new battery with used one e Make sure the plus and minus terminals are correctly aligned when loading a battery e Keep a battery away from children and pets e Do not recharge short circuit solder or disassemble a battery e Do not place a battery in a fire or water Keep batteries in a dark cool and dry place e If you observe battery leakage wipe out the leakage and then replace a battery If the leakage adheres to your body or clothes rinse well with water immediately e Obey the local laws on disposing the battery ENGLISH i Arrangement Refer to tables T 1 to T 6 at the back of this manual as well as the following to determine the screen size and projection distance The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen _ x WV Screen size Projector top Projection distance from the front of the projector unit Screen height Projector bottom AAWARNING P Install the projector where you can access the power outlet easily gt Install the projector in a stable horizontal position e Do not use any mounting accessories except
203. included CD ROM titled User s Manual detailed Before using the CD ROM please read the following to ensure the proper use E System requirements The system for using the CD ROM requires the following ENGLISH i Windows OS Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 or later Macintosh OS Mac OS 10 2 or later CD ROM DVD ROM drive Applications Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 and Adobe Acrobat Reader 8 0 or later E How to use the CD 1 Insert CD into computer s CD ROM drive Windows In a while Web browser automatically starts Start up window comes up Macintosh 1 Double click on the Projectors icon appeared on the desktop screen 2 When main htm file is clicked Web browser will start and Initial window will appear 2 Click the model name of your projector first and then click language you want from the displayed list The User s manual detailed will open ACAUTION P Only use the CD ROM in a computer CD DVD drive The CD ROM is designed for computer use only NEVER INSERT THE CD ROM INTO A NON COMPUTER CD DVD PLAYER Inserting the CD ROM into an incompatible CD DVD drive may produce a loud noise which in turn MAY RESULT IN EAR AND SPEAKER DAMAGE e After using CD ROM please put it into CD case and keep it Please keep the CD neither in direct sunlight nor in a high temperature and high humidity environment NOTE The information in the CD ROM is subject to change
204. ings If there is a wireless configuration utility loaded on your computer check its settings Please refer the manual of your configuration utility The computer and or projector s network settings are not configured correctly Check the network configurations of the computer and projector The same network address is set for both wireless and wired LAN Change the network address setting for wireless or wired LAN lt Only for wireless LAN gt The USB wireless adapter is not inserted into the projector lt Only for wireless LAN gt There is closely another projector or other that has the same wireless setting Insert the optional USB wireless adapter Try changing of SSID and IP Address Others Information from the projector to computer is not correct or completed The projector does not respond 68 Communication between the projector and computer is not working well NETWORK Functions of the projector is not working well Try NETWORK RESTART in SERVICE menu under the NETWORK menu In the Operating Guide a Specifications tem __ Specifications Control software Dedicated computer application and Web browser Corresponding TCP IP DHCP client and HTTP server protocol Wireless LAN IEEE802 11b g n Network Ad Hoc and Infrastructure modes Wired LAN 100Base TX 10Base T WEP 64 128bit WPA PSK TKIP AES WPA2 PSK TKIP AES SSID OS Win
205. internal speakers will be muted Please refer to the a button BLANK item in SCREEN menu about the BLANK screen L459 To exit from the AV MUTE mode and restore the screen and audio press AV MUTE button again NOTE The projector automatically exits from the AV MUTE mode when some control buttons are pressed Selecting an input signal 4 Press INPUT button on the projector Each time you press the button the projector switches its input port from the current port as below COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 gt LAN L INPUT button VIDEO USB TYPEA NV a USB TYPE B COMPONENT HDMI 2 HDMI 1 cH NOTE If you have set SKIP to some ports from SOURCE SKIP in the OPTION menu the input from the ports cannot be selected M65 e While ON is selected for AUTO SEARCH item in OPTION menu the projector will keep checking the ports in above order repeatedly till an input signal is detected L465 e It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port 4 Press COMPUTER 1 2 LAN USB TYPE A B HDMI 1 2 COMPONENT S VIDEO or VIDEO button on the remote control The port corresponding to each button is selected as below COMPUTER 1 COMPUTER IN1 COMPUTER 2 COMPUTER IN2 LAN LAN USB TYPEA USB TYPEA USB TYPE B USB TYPE B HDMI 1 HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 2 COMPONENT COMPO
206. ion No pictures are The computer cannot detect the projector as a plug displayed and play monitor Make sure that the computer can detect a plug and play monitor using another plug and play monitor The lens shade is closed Check whether the SHADE indicator is blinking If it is blinking press SHADE button on the control panel 124 continued on next page Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Reference Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect The batteries in the remote control are near the end Replace the batteries The ID numbers set in the projector and the remote The remote control are different control does not Press the ID button with the same ID number as the work projector then perform the desired operation The ID number set in the projector can be displayed by pressing any of the ID buttons on the remote control for 3 seconds while the lamp is on 17 Video screen The FREEZE function is working 36 display freezes Press FREEZE button to restore the screen to normal Color settings are not correctly adjusted Colors have Perform picture adjustments by changing the COLOR 45 a faded out TEMP COLOR and or TINT settings using the menu appearance functions or color tone iS COLOR SPACE setting is not suitable paai Change the COLOR SPACE setting to AUTO RGB SMPTE240 REC709 or REC601 The brightness and or contrast are adjuste
207. ion on off Turns the FRAME LOCK COMPUTER IN2 function on off SETUP AUTO KEYSTONE EXECUTE KEYSTONE V KEYSTONE H PERFECT FIT AUTO ECO MODE ECO MODE INSTALLATION FRAME LOCK HDMI 1 FRAME LOCK HDMI 2 Turns the FRAME LOCK HDMI 1 function on off Turns the FRAME LOCK HDMI 2 function on off Performs the automatic keystone distortion setting Adjusts the vertical keystone distortion setting Adjusts the horizontal keystone distortion setting Adjusts the shape of the projected image in each of the corners and sides Turns on off the automatic eco mode function Selects the eco mode Selects the installation status STANDBY MODE Selects the standby mode MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN1 MONITOR OUT COMPUTER IN2 MONITOR OUT USB TYPEA MONITOR OUT USB TYPE B MONITOR OUT HDMI 1 MONITOR OUT LAN Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN1 input port is selected Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPUTER IN2 input port is selected Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the LAN input port is selected Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE A input port is selected Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the USB TYPE B input port is selected Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the HDMI 1 input port is selected MONITOR OUT HDMI 2 Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the HDMI 2 input port is selected MONITOR OUT COMPONENT Assigns the MONITOR OUT when the COMPONENT input port is selected
208. ion setting Wired LAN ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 1 3 1 Equipments connection cc cscscsineudacacecesttexzadondaecotasecgarecd aieistbatacdshvsceas Meuviubanasoad aniodsnndidaceadet 7 taa Network SeS srra cineraane maannecnsiaananouansccnenrencembaganeeronsa ncaa smeenenranseacanemauagen 7 Toa Meme r Opion Seng siississacrcssssocsasainmmncrsanctsasarntndeataniseteruniunatatsencisaiiwininassessaueabanail 10 1 4 Manual network connection setting Wireless LAN c seseeeseeeees 11 1 4 1 Preparation for wireless LAN connection cccceccccceseecceeeeceneeceeeeeseuseessgeessageessaneess 11 1 4 2 Wireless LAN connection set up c ciscs scnicsuecsicctaxssncscnss scevacesanncdsscaes canvecsscnsianseedeveehaacacws ends 12 2 NetWOrK Presentatioi sinceccesecctgucoesesensunncsednintnnnsceeriaeinenerenne 15 3 Web COMMON ssisnirireisnasrirarsiorinisiannniinnini raia 16 3 1 Projector Web Control 5 ccansecarenatasaternasesotmsodecangesvncssateuansisbeniettosapeoiienmetite 17 Mad LOGON spa pec citeceesa ries ne E E E E E E EEE E 17 Oo ez ING RW ONG IMONT AUO sagrari i enaA EA ANE a RRE E AEAN ANELADA 18 3 ko NeWOork SENOS neraaianpeisniainhanianigisedaniideianicitereblonauuntensa immense E 19 3 1 4 Port Settings xescnccdessicauerthatcomxcalansaudnenned seudaledaanubeesiniean obseehebamertnigegmeebinrnanbanielencotehaeneiio 22 2 ko Mal SONOS casicunecasoneiepesanindtiaueanacoseoinenncucuaasasanmepenanumesanmnen eaten
209. is selected in the LAMP MODE dialog M75 Select the AUTO or NORMAL lamp switching mode when using ALTERNATE 1 Highlight ALTERNATE MODE in the STACK menu with the A V buttons then press the gt button to display the ALTERNATE MODE dialog 2 Use the A buttons in the dialog to highlight AUTO or NORMAL AUTO Turns on the projector with the least lamp usage NORMAL Turns on the projector that was not used the previous time 3 Press the lt button to return to the previous menu or press the gt button to complete the setting E79 NOTE The ALTERNATE MODE dialog can be operated on the Main projector when ALTERNATE is selected in the LAMP MODE dialog e To maintain the quality and reliability of the two projectors the projector with the most lamp usage may be turned on even if AUTO is selected STACK menu settings 3 5 Selecting input source for Sub 1 Highlight SUB INPUT SOURCE in the STACK iste menu with the A V buttons then press the gt DEUN SENT button to display the SUB INPUT SOURCE dialog 2 Use the A buttons in the dialog to highlight FOLLOW MAIN UNIT or FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 FOLLOW MAIN UNIT Sets the input source on the Sub projector to the same port as Main FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 Sets the input source on the Sub projector to the COMPUTER IN1 port which is connected to the MONITOR OUT port on the Main projector 3 Press the lt button to return to the previous menu or press the gt butto
210. isabled DNS Server Configures the DNS server address To apply the settings click the Send button 4 User Password Configures the User Password To prompt the entry of User Password before starting e Control select the checkbox ltem Description O O O O O O Configures the password You can specify a password up to 26 alphanumeric characters The usable symbols are space and the following 8 lt gt ON h Reenter the above password for verification If the password is incorrect an error message is displayed New Password Confirm To apply the settings click the Send button 5 Admin Password Configures the Admin Password To prompt the entry of Admin Password before displaying the Tools window select the checkbox o ltem O scription O O O O SO Configures the password You can specify a password up to 26 alphanumeric characters The usable symbols are space and the following HS amp 4 lt gt ON h Reenter the above password for verification If the password is incorrect an error message is displayed New Password Confirm To apply the settings click the Send button 46 3 2 Crestron e Control continued 3 2 3 Info window eT BBB BB EBBHBHBHR eT BBB BEBE BEBE RM Propecia kica Propecia Dats 1 i 2 ae ee ee ee ee ee id ae ee ee ee ee ee Displays the settings and status of the projector Click the Exit button to return
211. isplayed on the screen proceed to 3 below Otherwise press the MENU button on the remote control If the MENU dialog is displayed use the A V buttons to iag highlight MAIN and press the button A menu will be displayed If the MENU dialog is not displayed the STACK menu will appear 2 Use the A W lt P buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt OPTION SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION _ STACK gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION gt STACK aia DUAL STACK menu will appear on screen soit CQ Operating Guide OPTION menu 3 Use the A F buttons to highlight SUB INPUT hot hela SOURCE and press the gt button to display the eae SUB INPUT SOURCE dialog 4 Use the A F buttons to highlight FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 and press the gt button to complete the setting 179 i RETURN LR FEXIT MAIN INPUT SOURCE 5 Press any button to select an input port on the remote control or the INPUT button of the Main COMPUTER IN 2 projector The MAIN INPUT SOURCE dialog is displayed on screen Use the A V buttons to highlight the port to which the signal cable is connected and press the gt button to complete the setting NOTE When FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is selected the MONITOR OUT setting is invalid QOperating Guide SETUP menu e When FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is selected input sources other than COMPUTER IN1 and COMPUTER IN2 cannot be selected e When FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is selected if any button to select an i
212. it may not be able to control an external device well depending on the processing status of the projector 55 Ta Other FUNCIOMS 7 1 E mail Alerts The projector can automatically send an alert message to the specified e mail addresses when the projector detects a certain condition that is requiring maintenance or detected an error NOTE Up to five e mail addresses can be specified e The projector may be not able to send e mail if the projector suddenly loses power Mail Settings 124 To use the projector s e mail alert function please configure the following items through a web browser Example If the IP address of the projector is set to 192 168 1 10 1 Enter http 192 168 1 10 into the address bar of the web browser and select Projector Web Control from the selection window 2 Enter your user name and password and then click the OK 3 Click the Mail Settings and configure each item Refer to item 3 1 5 Mail Settings 124 for further information 4 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE Click the Send Test Mail button in the Mail Settings to confirm that the e mail settings are correct The following mail will be delivered to the specified addresses Subject line Test Mail lt Projector name gt Text Send Test Mail Date lt Testing date gt Time lt Testing time gt IP Address lt Projector IP address gt MAC Address lt Projector MAC address gt 56
213. ither WPA PSK and WPA2 PSK cannot be selected If IEEE802 11 n is used while MODE is set to INFRASTRUCTURE TKIP and WEP are disabled If OFF or AES is not selected communication will switch automatically to IEEE802 11 b g ENCRYPTION continued on next page 78 ltem scription Use the A V buttons to select the ezm SSID to display the Raum SSID menu SSCANCEL 1 DEFAULT 2 DEFAULT 3 DEFAULT tL 5 CUSTOM 4 DEFAULT 1 Select one of the DEFAULT 1 4 and press gt or ENTER button To adjust CUSTOM Press the or ENTER button when the 5 CUSTOM is selected The SSID 5 CUSTOM menu will be appeared 1 The current SSID will be displayed on the first line If not yet written the line will be blank Use the A lt P gt buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time press the RESET button or press the lt and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT button 1 character or all characters will be WIRELESS erased The SSID can be input up to 32 characters SETUP 2 To change an TEE 7 continued already inserted character press the A V button to move the cursor to one of the first 2 lines and use the lt gt buttons to move the cursor on the character to be changed After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button the character is selected Then
214. its manual User s Manual concise Follow the instructions that can be obtained at the site for updating This application will appear as an icon in the Windows notification area once it starts You can quit the application from your computer by selecting Quit on the menu NOTE The LiveViewer refer to the Network Guide and this application cannot be used at the same time If you connect your computer to the projector by using a USB cable while the LiveViewer is running the following message will be displayed e Depending on the software installed on your computer images on your computer cannot be transferred using LiveViewer Lite for USB e If any application software having the firewall function is installed into your computer make the firewall function invalid with following the user s manual e Some security software may block image transmission Please change the security software setting to allow the use of LiveViewer Lite for USB e When the audio input from USB TYPE B M57 is selected if the sound level is still low even after raising the volume level in the projector to the maximum check whether your computer outputs audio and raise the volume level accordingly 110 USB Display continued Right Click menu The menu shown in the right will be displayed l Display when you right click the application icon in the Windows notification area Display The Floating menu is
215. jector to adjust the screen size 2 Use the FOCUS buttons to focus the picture NOTE The projector may ignore operation by 853 O Sep aS A other buttons while the lens is moving COLO L ZOOM button FOCUS FUNCTION O O O Adjusting the lens position Press the LENS SHIFT button The LENS SHIFT dialog will appear Using the A W lt buttons while the dialog is displayed shifts the lens Generally better image quality can be got when the lens is set to the center FOCUS FUNCTION Press the LENS SHIFT button again to exit the buttons button LENS SHIFT function oe LENS SHF CENTERING Press the ENTER or INPUT button while the dialog is displayed to execute the CENTERING feature which adjusts the lens to the center A message dialog is dis played for confirmation Pressing the button performs CENTERING You can also perform CENTERING in the standby mode by pressing the FUNCTION and LENS SHIFT buttons on the control panel for 3 seconds at the same time NOTE While the lens is moving to the center the menu will disappear and an hourglass icon will appear on the screen CENTERING may take some time till the lens reaches the center e The projector may ignore operation by buttons while moving the lens e The CENTERING feature while the projector is in the standby mode is disabled if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING Perform CENTERING before the projector s
216. k PJLink is a trademark applied for trademark rights in E a Japan the United States of America and other countries and areas r3JLink e Blu ray Disc and Blu ray are trademarks of Blu ray Disc Association e DICOM is the registered trademark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association for its standards publications relating to digital communications of medical information All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners HITACHI Read this Safety Guide first Inspire the Next Projector User s Manual Safety Guide Thank you for purchasing this projector NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice e The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual e The reproduction transmission or use of this document or contents is not permitted without express written authority About The Symbols Various symbols are used in this manual the user s manual and on the product itself to ensure correct usage to prevent danger to the user and others and to prevent property damage The meanings of these symbols are described below It is important that you read these descriptions thoroughly and fully understand the contents This symbol indicates information that if ignored could AN WARNING possibly result in personal injury or even death due to incorrect handling This symbol indicates information that if ignored could AN
217. l processing delay or is output Change the signal or use another port intermittently The computer The computer cannot start up in the current connected to hardware configuration the USB TYPE Disconnect the USB cable from the computer then Bportofthe reconnect it after starting up the computer projector does not start up The SAVING function is working Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu RS 232C does not work The COMMUNICATION TYPE for the CONTROL port is set to NETWORK BRIDGE Select OFF for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu The SAVING function is working Select NORMAL for STANDBY MODE item in the SETUP menu Network does not work The same network address is set for both wireless and wired LAN Change the network address setting for wireless or wired LAN continued on next page 126 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Reference Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect NETWORK BRIDGE function does not work Schedule function does not work When the projector is connected to the network it powers off and on as described below Powers off POWER indicator blinks in orange a few times Goes into standby mode The NETWORK BRIDGE function is turned off Select NETWORK BRIDGE for COMMUNICATION TYPE item in the OPTION SERVICE COMMUNICATION menu The S
218. lanta 5 Edificios Trade Torre Este 08028 Barcelona SPAIN Tel 0034 934 092 5 50 Email Atencion Cliente hitachi eu com Hitachi Europe AB Fr sundaviks Alle 15 169 29 Solna SWEDEN Sweden Tel 46 8 562 711 00 Finland Tel 358 10 8503 085 Norway Tel 47 9847 3898 Denmark Tel 46 8 562 711 00 gt http www hitachidigitalmedia com Hitachi Australia Pty Ltd Suite 801 Level 8 123 Epping Road North Ryde N S W 2113 AUSTRALIA Tel 61 2 9888 4100 gt http www hitachi com au Hitachi Hong Kong Ltd 18 F Ever Gain Centre 28 On Muk Street Shatin N T HONG KONG Tel 852 2113 8883 gt http www hitachi hk com hk Hitachi Sales Malaysia Sdn Bhd Lot 12 Jalan Kamajuan Bangi Industrial Estate 43650 Bandar Baru Bangi Selangor Darul Ehsan MALAYSIA Tel 60 3 8911 2670 gt http Awww hitachiconsumer com my Hitachi Home Electronics ary S Pte Ltd 438A Alexandra Road 01 01 02 03 Alexandra Technopark 119967 SINGAPORE Tel 65 6536 2520 gt http www hitachiconsumer com sq Hitachi Sales ed of Taiwan 2 Floor No 65 Nanking East Road Section 3 Taipei 104 TAIWAN Tel 886 2 2516 0500 gt http www hsct com tw Hitachi Sales Thailand Ltd 994 996 Soi Thonglor Sukhumvit 55 Rd Klongtonnua Vadhana Bangkok 10110 THAILAND Tel 66 2381 8381 98 gt http www hitachi th com Hitachi Consumer Electronics Co Ltd 292 Yoshida cho Totsuka ku Yokohama 244 0817 JAPA
219. le the projector is suspended from a ceiling This is dangerous since if the lamp s bulb has broken the shards will fall out when the cover is opened In addition working in high places is dangerous so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken e Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed At the lamp replacing make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly Loose screws could result in damage or injury e Use only the lamp of the specified type Use of a lamp that does not meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire damage or shorten the life of this product e If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp If this happens consult your local dealer or a service representative e Handle with care jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use e Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause it dark not to light up or to burst When the pictures appear dark or when the color tone is poor please replace the lamp as soon as possible Do not use old used lamps this is a cause of breakage Cleaning and replacing the air filter Please check and clean the air filter periodically When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter comply with it as soon as possible A The filter unit with 2 sheets of filters is inside of the filter cov
220. lects Closed Caption MODE setting C C CHANNEL Selects Closed Caption CHANNEL setting continued on next page 36 Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE HDMI 2 input port Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE COMPONENT input port Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE S VIDEO input port Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE VIDEO input port Assigns the AUDIO SOURCE in the standby mode Selects the HDMI audio setting of the HDMI 1 port Selects the HDMI audio setting of the HDMI 2 port 3 1 Projector Web Control Projector Control continued Item Description OPTION SOURCE SKIP COMPUTER IN1 Selects the Source Skip COMPUTER IN1 setting SOURCE SKIP COMPUTER IN2 SOURCE SKIP LAN Selects the Source Skip COMPUTER IN2 setting Selects the Source Skip LAN setting SOURCE SKIP USB TYPEA Selects the Source Skip USB TYPE A setting SOURCE SKIP USB TYPE B SOURCE SKIP HDMI 1 SOURCE SKIP HDMI 2 Selects the Source Skip USB TYPE B setting Selects the Source Skip HDMI 1 setting Selects the Source Skip HDMI 2 setting SOURCE SKIP COMPONENT Selects the Source Skip COMPONENT setting SOURCE SKIP S VIDEO Selects the Source Skip S VIDEO setting SOURCE SKIP VIDEO AUTO SEARCH Selects the Source Skip VIDEO setting Turns the automatic signal search function on off AUTO KEYSTONE Turns the automatic k
221. ler Do not place the projector on an unstable surface If the projector should be dropped and or broken it could result in an injury and continued use could result in fire or electrical shock e Do not place the projector on an unstable slant or vibrant surface such as a wobbly or inclined stand e Use the caster brakes placing the projector on a stand with casters e Do not place the projector in the side up position the lens up position or the lens down position e In the case of a ceiling installation or the like contact your dealer before installation 2 Disconnect the plug from the power outlet 9 Do not disassemble 9 9 N WARNING Be cautious of High temperatures of the projector High temperatures are generated when the lamp is lit It could result in fire or burn Use special caution in households where children are present Do not touch about the lens air fans and ventilation openings during use or immediately after use to prevent a burn Take care of ventilation e Keep a space of 30 cm or more between the sides and other objects such as walls e Do not place the projector on a metallic table or anything weak in heat e Do not place anything about the lens air fans and ventilation openings of the projector e Never block the air fan and ventilation openings e Do not cover the projector with a tablecloth etc e Do not place the projector on a carpet or bedding Never look throu
222. llectual Stack it is recommended to check all the settings in the STACK menu For dialogs that are called from the STACK menu you can press the lt button to return to the STACK menu Refer to the following to exit menu operation for Intellectual Stack STACK menu SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION _ STACK When you press the lt button functioning LAMP MODE DUAL LTERNATE MODE NORMAL as RETURN key after performing some aghi HEUT SOURCE FOLLOW MAIN UNIT 4 SRE TURN changes to the settings a confirmation dialog will appear SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION _ STACK as oo ARE YOU SURE e Pressing the gt button functioning as YES TNGUINESH TO CHANGE STACK SETTING JNO EYES key in the dialog saves the setting and closes the dialog The screen becomes black while the setting is being applied Please wait for a while e Pressing the lt button functioning as NO key in the dialog returns you to the COMMUNICATION menu without saving the setting MoOperating Guide OPTION menu SERVICE Dialog from STACK menu anda When you press the gt button functioning as EXIT FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 key after performing some changes to the set cael tings a confirmation dialog will appear SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION STACK ARE YOU SURE YOU WISH TO CHANGE STACK SETTING Osa is5 e Pressing the gt button functioning as YES key in the dialog saves the setting and closes the dialog The screen becomes black while the setting i
223. ly into the lamp housing and for gas containing mercury and dust containing fine particles of glass to escape from the projector s vent holes gt About disposal of a lamp This product contains a mercury lamp do not put itin a trash Dispose of it in accordance with environmental laws e For lamp recycling go to www lamprecycle org in the US e For product disposal consult your local government agency or www eiae org in the US or www epsc ca in Canada For more information call your dealer e If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does unplug the power cord from the outlet and make sure to request a replacement lamp from your local dealer Note that shards of glass could damage the projector s internals or cause injury during handling Z so please do not try to clean the projector or replace the lamp yourself e If the lamp should break it will make a loud bang when it does ventilate the Disconnect room well and make sure not to inhale the gas or fine particles that come out the plug from the projector s vent holes and not to get them into your eyes or mouth from the swe Before replacing the lamp turn the projector off and unplug the power outlet Cord then wait at least 45 minutes for the lamp to cool sufficiently Handling the lamp while hot can cause burns as well as damaging the lamp e Never unscrew except the appointed marked by an arrow screws e Do not open the lamp cover while the p
224. m Filter Time Alarm Lamp time over Alarm Time setting Filter time over Alarm Time setting Filter Status Notification The status to clean the air filter is changed Transition Detector Alarm Cold Start Transition Detector Alarm SECURITY menu in the Operating Guide When the projector is supplied with the power it works as below e If the STANDBY MODE is set to the NORMAL the projector s power status changes from OFF to Standby state e If the STANDBY MODE is set to the SAVING the projector s power status changes from Standby state to ON lamp is turned on SETUP menu in the Operating Guide Authentication Failure The SNMP access is detected from the invalid SNMP community Refer to LATroubleshooting in the Operating Guide for further detailed explanation of Error except Other Error and Schedule Execution Error 25 3 1 Projector Web Control Alert Settings continued The Alert Items are shown below Item Description Configures the time to alert Only Lamp Time Alarm and Filter Time Alarm SNMP Trap Click the Enable check box to enable SNMP Trap alerts Send Mail Click the Enable check box to enable e mail alerts Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure Configures the subject line of the e mail to be sent r The length of the subject line can be up to 100 alphanumeric malt SUDER characters Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure Configu
225. mbnail Saves the image on the projector screen along with any text or pictures drawn onto a USB storage device connected to the projector e Files are saved with the file name Pxxx bmp where xxx is a consecutive number into a folder named PJ_ Capture If it does not already exist a PJ Capture folder is created automatically e The time stamp of saved files are as per the date and time settings of the projector Check the DATE AND TIME setting for WIRELESS SETUP or WIRED SETUP in the NETWORK menu E4178 82 e The tool bar is not saved Copyright protected images cannot be saved e Drawing with this function cannot be saved to MyScreen 2260 107 Drawing function continued 6 Projector ced Temporarily blanks out the display Operation Another touching or clicking recovers the display r m Toggles between display hide the Pattern grid lines Cycles through the display source signals e It can be used in the same way as the INPUT button on the control panel However images cannot be selected from the LAN port or the USB TYPE B port Weer Turns off the projector Touch click the icon for three seconds or so e If you turn the projector off while using the drawing function any unsaved drawings will be lost 7 Mouse When the computer screen is displayed this function operates the Operation computer like a simple mouse or keyboard In order to use this function connect the USB T
226. mode 038 INFORMATION Displays SYSTEM_INFORMATION INPUT_INFORMATION 475 WIRELESS INFORMATION 80 WIRED INFORMATION 482 or nothing MY BUTTON AUTO KEYSTONE Performs automatic keystone distortion correction L54 MY MEMORY Loads one of adjustment data stored 446 When more than one data are saved the adjustment changes every time the MY BUTTON is pressed When no data is saved in memory the dialog No saved data appears When the current adjustment is not saved to memory the dialog as shown in the right appears If you want to keep the current adjustment please press the gt button to exit Otherwise loading a data will overwrite the current adjusted condition ACTIVE IRIS Changes the active iris mode 146 PICTURE MODE Changes the PICTURE MODE 0442 FILTER RESET Displays the filter time reset confirmation dialogue 67 TEMPLATE Makes the template pattern selected to the TEMPLATE item 4163 appear or disappear MUTE Turns the audio mute on off RESOLUTION Turns on off the RESOLUTION dialog 453 ECO MODE Turns on off the ECO MODE dialog 155 continued on next page 68 Selecting this item displays the SERVICE menu Select an item using the A V buttons and press the button or the ENTER button on the remote control to execute the item ALTITUDE Using the A V buttons switches the rotation speed of the cooling fans It is recommended to leave it at AUTO usually
227. mode and a menu is being displayed on one of the projectors the Schedule function for My Image and Messenger on the other projector will not be executed e Power Off in the table refers to turning off the power and entering the standby mode according to the Intellectual Stack settings or by pressing the STANDBY button on the remote control or STANDBY ON button of the Main projector e The projectors cannot be turned on by the Schedule function on the Sub projector Set it on the Main projector if necessary e When the Sub projector is turned off according to the ALTERNATE MODE setting the Schedule function on the Sub projector to turn off its power will be executed without error 31 m roubleshooting About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect check and cope with it according to the following table Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects Reference Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect page No power is supplied to the Main and Sub projector To use the Intellectual Stack feature supply AC power to both the Main and Sub projectors If AC power is supplied to only one of the projectors Intellectual Stack is disabled The RS 232C cable between the Main and Sub projectors is not properly connected To use the Intellectual Stack feature connect an RS 232C cross cable between the Main and Sub projectors If the cable is not connected the Main projector cannot control th
228. mp housing and for gas containing mercury to escape from the projector s vent holes Please carefully read the section Lamp Be careful in handling the power cord and external connection cables If you keep using a damaged the power cord or cables it can cause a fire or electrical shock Do not apply too much heat pressure or tension to the power cord and cables If the power cord or cables is damaged exposed or broken core wires etc contact your dealer e Do not place the projector or heavy objects on the power cord and cables Also do not place a spread cover etc over them because this could result in the inadvertent placing of heavy objects on the concealed power cord or cables e Do not pull the power cord and cables When connecting and disconnecting the power cord or cables do it with your hand holding the plug or connector e Do not place the cord near the heater e Avoid bending the power cord sharply e Do not attempt to work on the power cord Be careful in handling the battery of the remote control Incorrect handling of the battery could result in fire or personal injury The battery may explode if not handled properly e Keep the battery away from children and pets If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment e Do not allow the battery in a fire or water e Avoid fire or high temperature environment e Do not hold the battery with the metallic tweezers e Keep the battery
229. n Configures the DNS server address Select from 1 to 11 a channel to use in the Ad Hoc mode NOTE Depending on the country where you are the channels may vary In addition depending on the country or region where you are may be required to use a wireless network card that confirm to the standards in the respective country or region Select data encryption method WPA Passphrase Input the WEP key Either ASCII characters or hexadecimal numbers can be used during WEP key input However you cannot use a combination of both The length of the key is defined as follows according to the WEP and character formats ASCII characters HEX numbers 5 characters 10 characters 13 characters 26 characters Encryption WEP 64bit WEP 128bit Input WPA Passphrase Available number of input characters is 8 to 63 Only alphabets numbers and following symbols can be used 5 amp lt gt N h and space continued on next page Select an SSID from the list If you require to set your unique SSID select Custom then set your own SSID following the rules below Maximum number of input characters is 32 Only alphabets numbers and following symbols can be used HS amp 5 lt gt and space 3 1 Projector Web Control Network Settings continued Item Description Wired Setup Configures the wired LAN settings IP Configuration Configures netw
230. n You can also use the remote control to select an input signal Press any of the buttons from COMPUTER 1 2 LAN USB TYPE A B HDMI 1 2 COMPONENT S VIDEO or VIDEO to select the input signal from each port 4 Press the ASPECT button on the remote control Each time you press the button the projector switches the mode for aspect ratio in turn D Use the ZOOM buttons on the remote gt ai JJ uttons for input ports USB USB TYPE TYPE A B control or ZOOM button and lt gt cursor buttons on the projector to adjust the screen size hee 6 Use the FOCUS buttons on the projector or one the remote control to focus the picture See ASPECT button aah al o E3 OOO ZOOM button SLS O O FOCUS TeS 7 r y OMENO HARA IY Tp e668 oE il b 00 Clam TACACCATNNTN FOCUS buttons ZOOM ZOOM buttons FOCUS FOCUS buttons ACAUTION P If you wish to have a blank screen while the projector s lamp is on use the lens shade or AV MUTE function see User s Manual Operating Guide Taking any other action may cause the damage on the projector NOTE The ASPECT button does not work when no proper signal is inputted e For the details of how to adjust the picture please see User s Manual Operating Guide 11 Turnin
231. n Green Lighting In Green Blinking In Green for approx 3 seconds continued on next page Blinking In Red Lighting In Red Simultaneous blinking in Red Alternative blinking in Red Turned off Turned off The cooling fan is not operating Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation that no foreign matter has become caught in the fan etc and then turn the power on again If the same indication is displayed after the remedy please contact your dealer or service company There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the following items and then turn the power on again e Is there blockage of the air passage aperture e Is the air filter dirty e Does the peripheral temperature exceed 45 C e If you use CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP SX8350 or CP WU8440 does the peripheral temperature exceed 40 C e Is the setting for ALTITUDE appropriate For details on ALTITUDE refer to ALTITUDE of SERVICE in the OPTION menu 69 If the projector is used with a wrong setting it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside It is time to clean the air filter Please immediately turn the power off and clean o
232. n SETUP menu NORMAL CQ Operating Guide SETUP menu COMMUNICATION TYPE under COMMUNICATION in SERVICE menu OFF Operating Guide OPTION menu STACK LOCK in SECURITY menu OFF M5 STACK menu settings 3 2 Selecting Main Sub or off To enable Intellectual Stack select either MAIN or SUB Intellectual Stack starts when one projector is set to MAIN and the other is set to SUB in the STACK MODE dialog To disable Intellectual Stack select OFF 1 Highlight STACK MODE in the STACK menu with the A V buttons then press the gt button to display the STACK MODE dialog 2 Use the A V buttons in the dialog to highlight MAIN SUB or OFF OFF Disables Intellectual Stack MAIN Sets the projector to Main that functions as a control tower SUB Sets the projector to Sub that functions as a follower 3 Press the lt button to return to the previous menu or press the gt button to complete the setting E79 NOTE After setting Main or Sub the setting 5 information can be checked on Projector Web Control MNetwork Guide Projector Web Control Select Projector Status in the main menu of Projector Web Control The Stack Mode item shows whether your projector is setto MAIN 1 or SUB even if STACK MODE is set to OFF sei ee 14 STACK menu settings 3 3 Selecting lamp operation mode Select the DUAL or ALTERNATE lamp operation mode 1 Highlight LAMP MODE in the STACK menu with LAME MOD
233. n appropriate format for the video signal input Then use the A W lt gt buttons to highlight EXIT and press the button to complete the setting Inputting image to Sub and Main individually 1 If the STACK menu is already displayed on the screen proceed to 3 below Otherwise press the MENU button on the remote control If the MENU dialog is displayed use the A V buttons to highlight MAIN and press the gt button A menu will be displayed If the MENU dialog is not displayed the STACK menu will appear 2 Use the A W lt P buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt OPTION SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION _ STACK gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION gt STACK Em DUAL ALTERNATE MODE NORMAL SUB INPUT SOURCE FOLLOW MAIN UNIT 4 RETURN STACK menu will appear on screen CQ Operating Guide OPTION menu continued on next page 28 Setting input ports using menu 5 4 Setting the menu Inputting image to Sub and Main individually continued 3 Use the A F buttons to highlight SUB INPUT SOURCE and press the gt button to display the SUB INPUT SOURCE dialog 4 Use the A buttons to highlight FOLLOW MAIN Giri UNIT and press the button to complete the set EIA ting co 19 i DRE I URN Las 5 Press any button to select an input port on the cal ees remote control or the INPUT button of the Main COMPUTER IN 2 projector The MAIN INPUT SOURCE dialog will be displayed on screen Use the A V buttons j
234. n is detected for about 30 minutes the projector is turned off even though the AUTO POWER OFF function below is disabled Using the A V buttons adjusts the time to count down to automatically turn the projector off Long max 99 minutes Short min 0 minute DISABLE WOT PUTER D ENABLE SRE TUR EXIT 4 ERE TURN FEET When the time is set to 0 the projector is not turned off automatically When the time is set to 1 to 99 and when the passed time with no signal or an unsuitable signal reaches at the set time the projector lamp will be turned off If one of the projector s buttons or the remote control buttons is pressed or one of the commands except get commands is transmitted to the CONTROL port during the corresponding time projector will not be turned off Please refer to the section Turning off the power 24 AUTO POWER OFF Using the A V buttons sets the time from closing the lens shade to automatically turning the projector off SHADE TIMER ZENON e The shade will open automatically when turning the projector on again continued on next page 66 ltem scription Using the A V buttons selects the function of USB TYPE B port To use this function you need to connect the USB TYPE B port of the projector and the type A USB port of a computer MOUSE USB DISPLAY MOUSE The accessory remote control works as the simple mouse and keyboard of the computer USB DISPLAY The port wo
235. n off automatically For more information please see User s Manual Operating Guide 12 Replacing the lamp A lamp has finite product life Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause the pictures darker or the color tone poor Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them Preparation of a new lamp and early replacement are recommended To prepare a new lamp make contact with your dealer and tell the lamp type number Type number lt CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP WU8440 gt DT01281 Type number lt CP X8160 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8450 gt DT01291 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord 3 Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes IL O Z LL 2 Prepare a new lamp If the projector is mounted i gt M with specified mounting accessories or if the lamp has broken also ask the dealer to replace the lamp In case of replacement by yourself follow the following procedure 3 Loosen the screw marked by arrow of the lamp cover and then slide down and lift the lamp cover to remove it 4 Loosen the 3 screws marked by arrow of the lamp and slowly pull the lamp out by the handles Never loosen any other screws 5 Insert the new lamp and retighten firmly the Handles 4 5 3 screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous process to lock it in place i T i Pt q H o iain x ME QA 6 While
236. n to complete the setting M 79 NOTE e lt Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 gt When the projectors are in the PbyP mode the SUB INPUT SOURCE is fixed at FOLLOW MAIN UNIT e If FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is selected either the COMPUTER IN1 or IN2 port can be selected as an input source on the Main projector When any button to select an input port on the remote control or the INPUT button on the projector is pressed the MAIN INPUT SOURCE dialog will be displayed on screen Select COMPUTER IN 1 or COMPUTER IN 2 with the A F buttons e If FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is selected the COMPUTER IN1 port on the Sub projector should be connected to the MONITOR OUT port on the Main projector with a computer cable The image from the selected port is output from the MONITOR OUT port on the Main projector to the COMPUTER IN1 port on the Sub projector The MONITOR OUT setting on the Main projector is disabled when FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is selected EQOperating Guide gt SETUP menu e If FIXED COMPUTER IN 1 is selected video signals can be input to the COMPUTER IN1 or IN2 port on the Main projector Set the port for video signal input in the COMPUTER IN menu and set the video format in the VIDEO FORMAT menu Refer to nputting image from Main to Sub EQ24 and Inputting image from Main to Sub Video signal either component or video 128 18 STACK menu settings 3 6 Exiting Intellectual Stack menu Before exiting menu operation for Inte
237. nd press the gt button to display the STACK MODE dialog 2 Use the A V button to highlight OFF and then press the button to complete the setting L79 3 Repeat the above procedures to display the STACK MODE dialog again 4 Use the A V button to highlight SUB and then press the gt button to complete the setting G79 5 After exiting the menu wait for 10 seconds or more 6 Press the STANDBY button on the remote control or STANDBY ON button of the Main projector The Sub projector will turn off 7 After the projector has cooled down press the ON or STANDBY ON button to turn on again The Main projector will be turned on even if LAMP MODE has been set to AUTO 3 You can change the settings for Intellectual Stack now that the Main projector is operating Go to 5 4 Setting the menu 27 NOTE lf the Main projector cannot be turned on due to error or certain problems the Sub projector will be turned on even if you follow the procedures above Take necessary actions to fix the Main projector and then change the settings for Intellectual Stack Setting input ports using menu 5 4 Setting the menu If Intellectual Stack with RS 232C connection is used observe the followings When inputting image signals to Sub via Main the operations differ between using computer signals and video signals such as component and video signals Inputting image from Main to Sub Computer signal 1 If the STACK menu is already d
238. nded to clean it The air filter is choked Lighting In Red It is required to turn the power off and clean the air filter immediately NOTE The FILTER indicator might light up in orange or red when something blocks the intake vents even though the air filter is clean The FILTER indicator might light up differently from other indicators or display messages related to cleaning the air filter Follow the prompt that is displayed earlier Resetting all settings When it is hard to correct some wrong settings the FACTORY RESET function of SERVICE item in OPTION menu 175 can reset all settings except settings such as LANGUAGE LAMP TIME FILTER TIME FILTER MESSAGE STANDBY MODE COMMUNICATION SECURITY and NETWORK to the factory default 122 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects About the phenomenon confused with a machine defect check and cope with it according to the following table Reference Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect page The electrical power cord is not plugged in Correctly connect the power cord The main power source has been interrupted during operation such as by a power outage blackout etc Please disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and allow the projector to cool down at least 10 minutes Power does not hen turn the power on again come on Either there is no lamp and or lamp cover or either of these has not been properly fi
239. nents may be reduced by peripheral temperatures of over about 40 C It is recommended to reduce the temperature as far as possible 498 W x 135 H x 396 D mm Size Not including protruding parts Refer to figure F 5 at the back of this manual CP X8150 CP WX8240 approx 8 3 kg Weight mass CP X8160 CP WX8255 approx 8 6 kg CP SX8350 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 approx 8 7 kg continued on next page Temperature range 18 Specifications continued ltem Specification _ _ _ COMPUTER IN1 D sub 15 pin mini jack x1 COMPUTER IN2 H V G Y B Cb Pb R Cr Pr BNC jack x5 HDMI connector x1 HDMI connector x1 MONITOR OUT D sub 15 pin mini jack x1 COMPONENT Y Cb Pb Cr Pr RCA jack x3 Mini DIN 4 pin jack x1 RCA jack x1 AUDIO IN1 3 5 mm stereo mini jack x1 AUDIO IN2 3 5 mm stereo mini jack x1 AUDIO IN3 L R RCA jack x2 AUDIO OUT L R RCA jack x2 USB TYPE A USB type A connector x2 USB TYPE B USB type B connector x1 CONTROL D sub 9 pin plug x1 RJ45 jack x1 REMOTE CONTROL IN 3 5 mm stereo mini jack x1 REMOTE CONTROL OUT 3 5 mm stereo mini jack x1 Lamp DT01281 lt CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP WU8440 gt DT01291 lt CP X8160 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8450 gt Filter set MU06642 lt CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 gt UX38241 lt CP X8160 CP WX8255 CP WU8450 gt Lens unit SL 702 Short throw lens ML 703 Middle throw lens Optional parts LL 704 Long throw lens UL 705 Ultra long th
240. nput port on the remote control or the INPUT button on the Main projector is pressed the dialog for selecting the input source will be displayed ZT Setting input ports using menu Inputting image from Main to Sub Video signal either component or video 1 If the STACK menu is already displayed on the screen proceed to 3 below Otherwise press the MENU button on the remote control If the MENU dialog is displayed use the A V buttons to highlight MAIN and press the gt button A menu will be displayed If the MENU dialog is not displayed the STACK menu will appear E COMPUTER IN 2 Press the MENU button on the remote control or control panel on the Main projector Use the ENE A V 4 gt buttons to open the COMPUTER IN P mcire dialog MoOperating Guide gt INPUT menu 3 To input component signals to COMPUTER IN 1 or IN2 set the port to AUTO Then use the A W lt gt buttons to highlight EXIT and press the button to complete the setting To input video signals to COMPUTER IN1 or IN2 set the port to VIDEO If it is necessary to select a video format use the A W lt gt buttons to highlight RETURN and press the lt button to display the INPUT menu Otherwise use the A W lt P buttons to highlight EXIT and press the gt button to complete the setting 4 Select VIDEO FORMAT in the INPUT c act z menu to display the VIDEO FORMAT A ee ee COMPUTER IH 1 i dialog COMPUTERIN _ Select AUTO or a
241. ns shade EQOperating Guide Temporarily shading the screen SHADE TIMER EQOperating Guide OPTION menu SOURCE SKIP EQ Operating Guide OPTION menu PbyP EQOperating Guide PbyP lt Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 gt The following functions are disabled l a p ET Executing of AUTO KEYSTONE MoOperating Guide SETUP menu STANDBY MODE MoOperating Guide SETUP menu 3 AUTO SEARCH MoOperating Guide OPTION menu Small dialog Turning on off AUTO KEYSTONE MoOperating Guide OPTION menu DIRECT POWER ON MoOperating Guide OPTION menu AUTO POWER OFF MoOperating Guide OPTION menu COMMUNICATION TYPE MoOperating Guide OPTION menu SERVICE COMMUNICATION The input source from the following ports cannot be selected USB TYPE A USB TYPE B LAN lt Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 gt When the projectors are in the PobyP mode SUB INPUT SOURCE is fixed to FOLLOW MAIN UNIT When Intellectual Stack is in use an error message will be displayed if an error occurs on any of the projectors When an error occurs a full dialog will be displayed on screen The full dialog changes to a small dialog after about 20 seconds without any key activity While the small dialog is displayed pressing the lt button displays a full dialog again The numbers 1 and 2 above the projector icons represent the Main and Sub projectors respectively Refer to the on screen messages as shown below
242. ns to turn the AMX Device Discovery on off AMX D D aad AMX Device When ON is selected the projector can be detected by controllers Discovery of AMX connected to the same network For the details of AMX Device Discovery visit the AMX web site URL http Awww amx com as of Feb 2012 continued on next page 84 ltem scription O Selecting this item displays the PRESENTATION menu Use A V buttons to select one of the following items then press gt or ENTER button to use the function e To use Network Presentation an exclusive application LiveViewer is required It can be installed from the bundled application CD You can also download the latest version and relevant information from the Hitachi website http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com For details of Network Presentation and instructions to install the LiveViewer refer to the manual for LiveViewer If you set a computer to the Presenter mode while its image is projected the projector is occupied by the computer and access from any other computer is blocked QUIT Use this function to quit the Presenter mode and PRESENTER allow other computers to access the projector MODE Select this item to display a dialog Press button to choose OK in the dialog The Presenter mode is cancelled and a message is displayed indicating the result e To make Presenter mode setting use LiveViewer
243. o allocate the image file up to 4 in the maximum e Using MY BUTTON that registered MY IMAGE can display transferred image LQOPTION menu in the Operating Guide e The image file also can be displayed by using schedule function from the web browser Refer to item 7 3 Event Scheduling 159 in detail e If you display MY IMAGE data on screen while you are using the USB Display function the application for the USB Display will be closed To restart the application exit the MY IMAGE function and then the software in the projector LiveViewerLiteUSB exe will run again USB Display in the Operating Guide e If data is transferred via wireless and wired LAN at the same time the projector may not be able to process the data correctly 50 Oe MESMA RUNATA The projector can display text data transferred via the network on the screen and play back audio data inside the projector The text data can be displayed on the screen in two ways that displays the text transferred from the computer on real time and the other chooses and displays the text data from the ones once stored in the projector D abcdefghijkimnopqrstuvwxyz A ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUWXYZ 0123456789 P Today s Topics The chemical Today s Topics z E The chemical class is i canceled 12 WARNING FIRE ALERT The PE is performed at gym because today due Fa to bad weather A Sn Ss SSS Display text data ex D Messenger function requires an exclusiv
244. o not handle the elevator buttons without holding the projector since the projector may drop down gt Do not tilt the projector other than elevating its front within 9 degrees using the adjuster feet A tilt of the projector exceeding the restriction could cause malfunction or shortening the lifetime of consumables or the projector itself Only for CP X8160 CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 it is possible to install the projector for any direction with specified mounting accessories Consult with your dealer about such a special installation Adjusting the lens position Shifting the lens position shifts the projection position After pressing the LENS SHIFT button on the control panel or the remote control use the cursor buttons to shift the lens position LENS SHIFT LENS SHIFT button ACAUTION P amp Do not put your fingers or any other things around the lens The moving lens could catch them in the space around the lens and result in an injury Displaying the picture 1 Activate your signal source Turn the signal source on and make it send the signal to the projector 2 Use the VOL buttons to adjust the volume lo VOL buttons E2 OO gei E 0009 OG OOG8 5 grga Do FEB A 0 me ag BOO mo aajo S ENGLISH Fi Press the INPUT button on the projector Each time you press the button the projector switches its input port in tur
245. o the SECURITY right side of the ENTER PASSWORD box and press the gt button liyScreen PASS ORD to display the SECURITY menu Sa Sethi e It is strongly recommended the factory default password to be changed as soon as possible e If an incorrect password is input the ENTER PASSWORD box will be displayed again If incorrect password is input 3 times the projector will turn off Afterwards the projector will turn off every time an incorrect password is input 3 Items shown in the table below can be performed If you have forgotten your password 1 While the ENTER PASSWORD box is displayed press and hold the RESET button on the remote control for about 3 seconds or press and hold the INPUT button for 3 seconds while pressing the gt button on the projector 2 The 10 digit Inquiring Code will be displayed Contact your dealer with the 10 digit Inquiring Code Your password will be sent after your user registration information is confirmed e If there is no key input for about 55 seconds while the Inquiring Code is displayed the menu will close If necessary repeat the process from 1 1 Use the A buttons on the SECURITY menu to select SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE and press the gt button to display the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box 2 Use the A W lt P buttons to enter the new password 3 Move the cursor to the right side of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box and press the SECURITY gt button to display the NEW
246. of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent Trademark acknowledgment e Mac Macintosh and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc e Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corp e Adobe and Acrobat Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Microsoft Internet Explorer Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other countries e HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries e Blu ray Disc and Blu ray are trademarks of Blu ray Disc Association All other trademarks are the properties of their respective owners End User License Agreement for the Projector Software e Software in the projector consists of the plural number of independent software modules and there exist our copyright or and third party copyrights for each of such software modules e Be sure to read End User License Agreement for the Projector Software which is separated document in the CD B x V Screen size Projection distance from the front of the projector unit Screen height o Projector top oY Projector bottom CP X8150 with SL 702 1024 x 768 10 4 3 ee Projection Screen height eGo Polen Screen height
247. of the test pattern cannot be controlled with any of equalizing adjustment bar e Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction continued on next page 44 ltem scription Using the A V buttons switches the color temperature mode 1 HIGH 1 CUSTOM 2 MID 2 CUSTOM 3 LOW 3 CUSTOM 2 gt 6 CUSTOM 4 Hi BRIGHT 1 ts 6 Hi BRIGHT 3 5 CUSTOM gt 5 Hi BRIGHT 2 amp 4 CUSTOMe To adjust CUSTOM Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then pressing the gt button or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting the OFFSET and GAIN of the selected mode at COLOR TEMP OFFSET adjustments change the color Hons on the whole tones of the test pattern GAIN adjustments mainly affect color intensity on the brighter tones of the test pattern Choose an item using the lt gt buttons and adjust the level using the A V buttons You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER button Each time you press the ENTER button the pattern changes as below No pattern gt Gray scale of 9 steps L Ramp Gray scale of 15 steps e Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated but it is not a iji jji malfunction Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the strength of whole color Weak Strong e This item can be selected only for a video s video and component
248. ojector 0000 0000 O ccooe OA 06 o 0g OZ2ZAADWO DAUWDVGO A Z o Ar Cp ON NN ON OO Ol mm OOoOnN oon WD gt Ss ws was Ss NN NO Ol am OOoOnN oT A ON aS ws ws wa a ss SS WM gJ EP Communicaion settings 1 Protocol 19200bps 8N1 2 Command format h shows hexadecimal aca REC Oe aon pa ed e lt SET gt Change setting to S cH aL aH 01h 00h bL bH cL cH by bL bH aL aH 02h 00h bL bH 00h 00h NE Increment setup value BEN EFh 06h OOh Teal aH 04h 00h bL bH oon Ooh bL bH by 1 aa bbl fn Header code Packet Data size Set BEh EFh 03h 06h OOh to byte number 0 to 4 CRC flag For byte number 5 6 refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table 4119 Action Set functional code to byte number 7 8 lt SET gt 01h 00h lt GET gt 02h 00h lt INCREMENT gt 04h 00h lt DECREMENT gt 05h 00h lt EXECUTE gt 06h 00h Refer to the Communication command table LLabove Type Setting code For byte number 9 to 12 refer to RS 232C Communication Network command table 419 bL bH by 1 11 3 Response code Error code h shows hexadecimal 1 ACK reply 06h When the projector receives the Set Increment Decrement or Execute command correctly the projector changes the setting data for the specified item by Type and it returns the code
249. ojector e For simple PC mouse amp keyboard functions connect both the Main and Sub projectors to your computer with USB cables MOperating Guide Using as a simple PC mouse amp keyboard e AUTO SEARCH function is disabled when the projector is used in Intellectual Stack e Network communication to Sub and Web Control on Sub cannot turn on the Sub projector The Sub projector can only be controlled through the Main projector e The Web Remote Control function of the Sub projector is disabled GQNetwork Guide 3 1 11 Remote Control e If you try to turn on the projectors using the Power on amp Display on feature on the Messenger function the projectors will exit Intellectual Stack and display the specified message To start Intellectual Stack again re select MAIN SUB on both projectors in the STACK MODE dialog or turn off and on both projectors again continued on next page 20 STACK menu settings 3 7 Important information for Intellectual Stack continued The Main and Sub projectors have the following common settings AV MUTE MoOperating Guide Temporarily turning off the screen and audio Magnifying feature LLIOperating Guide Using the magnify feature ASPECT and OVER SCAN EQOperating Guide IMAGE menu COMPUTER IN MboOperating Guide INPUT menu MESSEAGE MoOperating Guide SCREEN menu MY BUTTON XOperating Guide OPTION menu TEMPLATE MoOperating Guide SCREEN menu Le
250. ollowing order The search is started from the current port Then when an input is found the projector will stop AUTO SEARCH searching and display the image COMPUTER IN1 gt COMPUTER IN2 gt LAN gt USB TYPE A 4 VIDEO USB TYPE B tT 4 S VIDEO lt COMPONENT HWHDMI2 HDMI 1 e It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB TYPE B port Using the A V buttons turns on off the automatic keystone function ON amp OFF ON Automatic keystone distortion correction will be executed whenever changing the slant of the projector AUTO OFF This function is disabled Please execute the AUTO KEYSTONE KEYSTONE EXECUTE in the SETUP menu for automatic keystone distortion correction e When the projector is suspended from the ceiling this feature will not function properly so select the OFF e This function will be unavailable when the Transition Detector is on 090 continued on next page 65 ltem scription Using the A V buttons turns on off the DIRECT POWER ON function ON OFF When set to the ON the lamp in projector will be automatically turned on without the usual procedure L24 only when the projector is DIRECT POWER supplied with the power after the power was cut while the lamp was on ON e This function does not work as long as the power has been supplied to the projector while the lamp is off e After turning the lamp on by the DIRECT POWER ON function if neither input nor operatio
251. omputer to communicate in both the Ad Hoc and Infrastructure modes This section is intended to explain how to set up wireless LAN connection manually 1 4 1 Preparation for wireless LAN connection Fig 1 4 1 6 With an access point communication Infrastructure Ad Hoc is one of the wireless LAN communication methods without having access point to communicate Infrastructure is one of the wireless LAN communication methods with having access point to communicate If certain quantities of equipments are used this mode is efficient If communicating with existing network consult to your network administrator First insert the USB wireless adapter into one of the USB TYPE A ports LQ Connecting with your devices in the Operating Guide Then set up the computer for wireless communication When the computer comes with a built in IEEE802 11b g n wireless LAN device enable it and disable other network connections If a wireless LAN device is not built into the computer connect an IEEE802 11b g n wireless LAN device and install the device driver For details refer to the user s guide for the computer and wireless LAN device 11 1 4 Manual network connection setting Wireless LAN continued 1 4 2 Wireless LAN connection set up Using wireless LAN utility for Windows 7 standard Wireless LAN initial settings for the projector is as follows Connection Control Ad Hoc SSID wireless Channel 1 Encryption rating
252. on of the ECO MODE displayed by changing e When the OFF is selected please remember if the picture is frozen Do not mistake freezing for a malfunction L36 continued on next page 61 ltem scription Each input port for this projector can have a name applied to it 1 Use the A V buttons on the SCREEN menu to select SOURCE NAME and press the gt or ENTER button The SOURCE NAME menu will be displayed 2 Use the A V buttons on the SOURCE z NAME menu to select the port to be named and press the gt button The SOURCE NAME dialog will be displayed Right side of the menu is blank until a name is specified 3 Select an icon you would like to assign to the port in the SOURCE NAME dialog SOURCE NAME The name assigned to the port will also be automatically switched according to your icon selection Press the ENTER or INPUT button to determine your icon selection 4 Select a number you would like to assign to the port along with the icon You can select the number either from blank no number assigned 1 2 3 or 4 Then press the ENTER or INPUT button 5 If you would like to modify the name assigned to the port select CUSTOM NAME and press the ENTER or INPUT button continued on next page 62 ltem scription 6 The current name will be displayed on the first line Use the A W lt gt buttons and the ENTER or INPUT button to select and enter characters To erase 1 character at one time p
253. or s current network configuration settings Item Description f Displays information common to both wireless and wired Common Information LAN Projector Name Displays the projector name settings Wireless Information Displays the current settings of wireless LAN Mode Displays the mode of wireless LAN communication DHCP Displays the DHCP setting IP Address Displays the IP address Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask Default Gateway Displays the default gateway DNS Server Address _ Displays the DNS server address MAC Address Displays the MAC address Ch Displays the channel used for wireless LAN Encryption Displays the data encryption setting SSID Displays the SSID used by the projector Speed Displays the current wireless LAN transmission speed ired Information Displays the current wired LAN settings DHCP Displays the DHCP setting IP Address Displays the IP address Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask Default Gateway Displays the default gateway DNS Server Address _ Displays the DNS server address MAC Address Displays the MAC address 18 3 1 Projector Web Control continued Displays and configures network settings Item Description Common Setup Configures the settings common to wireless and wired LAN Configures the name of the projector The length of the Projector Name can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters Only alphabets numbers and following sym
254. or and network related settings The computer Projector network connection might be disconnected Please re connect them continued on next page 118 Related messages continued gt COMPUTER IN 1 SYNG IS GUT OF RANGE 123kHZ E 123Hz lt gt COMPUTER IN 1 INVALID SCAN FREQ CHECK THE AIR FLOW The horizontal or vertical frequency of the input signal is not within the specified range Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal source specs An improper signal is input Please confirm the specs for your projector or the signal source specs The internal temperature is rising Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After having confirmed the following items please turn the power ON again e Is there blockage of the air passage aperture e Is the air filter dirty e Does the peripheral temperature exceed 45 C e f you use CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP SX8350 or CP WU8440 does the peripheral temperature exceed 40 C e Is the setting for ALTITUDE appropriate For details of ALTITUDE refer to ALTITUDE of SERVICE in the OPTION menu M69 If the projector is used with a wrong setting it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside A note of precaution when cleaning the air filter Please immediately turn the power off and clean or change the air filter referring to the Cleaning and replacing the air filter section of this man
255. or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 and an HDMI PROGRESSIVE signal of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 e When TV or FILM is selected the screen image will be sharp FILM adapts to the 2 3 Pull Down conversion system But these may cause a certain defect for example jagged line of the picture for a quick moving object In such a case please select OFF even though the screen image may lose sharpness Using the A V buttons switches the noise reduction mode HIGH MID amp LOW ij VIDEO NR e This function works only for a video signal s video signal component video signal of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 and an HDMI signal of 480i 60 or 576i 50 or 1080i 50 60 Using the A V buttons switches the mode for color space AUTO RGB amp SMPTE240 REC709 amp REC601 ia e This item can be selected only for a computer signal except for COLOR SPACE signals from the LAN USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B ports or a component video signal except SCART RGB e The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode e The AUTO operation may not work well at some signals In such a case it might be good to select a suitable mode except AUTO Using the A V buttons switches the function of the COMPONENT ports COMPONENT amp SCART RGB COMPONENT When the SCART RGB is selected the COMPONENT Y Cb Pb Cr Pr and VIDEO ports will function as a SCART RGB port A SCART adapter or SCART cable is required for a SCART RGB input to the
256. orage device inserted into USB TYPE A ports Neither sounds Use the REMOVE USB function first remove the USB nor pictures are storage device and then insert it into the port again outputted Before removing the USB storage device be sure to use continued the REMOVE USB function on the Thumbnail screen which appears when the USB TYPE A is selected as the input source The signal cables are not correctly connected 10 14 Correctly connect the audio cables The volume is adjusted to an extremely low level Adjust the volume to a higher level using the menu function or the remote control The AUDIO SOURCE SPEAKER setting is not correct Correctly set the AUDIO SOURCE SPEAKER in AUDIO menu Sound does not The mode selected for HDMI AUDIO is not suitable come out Check each of the two modes provided and select the suitable one for your HDMI audio device The Sound button J or checkbox is disabled If you have selected USB TYPE A turn the sound on from the Thumbnail menu If you have selected USB TYPE B remove the check mark from the Sound checkbox in the Options window of LiveViewer Lite for USB If you have selected LAN remove the check mark from the Sound checkbox in the Option menu of LiveViewer The signal cables are not correctly connected Correctly connect the connection cables The brightness is adjusted to an extremely low level Adjust BRIGHTNESS to a higher level using the menu funct
257. ork settings DHCP ON Enables DHCP DHCP OFF Disables DHCP IP Address Configures the IP address when DHCP is disabled Subnet Mask Configures the subnet mask when DHCP is disabled Default Gateway DNS Server Address Configures the DNS server address Other Setup Configures other network settings Set whether to or not to use Crestron e Control If you choose Disable the Logon window of Projector Web Control and not the selection window will be displayed at first of the Web Control Configures the default gateway when DHCP is disabled Crestron e Control Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection from Network Restart on the main menu 441 e If you connect the projector to an existing network consult a network administrator before setting server addresses e The WEP Key WPA passphrase and SSID settings will not be set if the invalid characters are used e The projector does not allow both wireless and wired LAN to be connected to the same network Do not set the same network address for both wireless and wired LAN 21 3 1 Projector Web Control continued 3 1 4 Port Settings Displays and configures communication port settings Item Description
258. ory device is inserted to the projector or no image data for display exists at the scheduled event time a schedule execution error occurs against the scheduled Slideshow event e When you start the Slideshow input source will be automatically switched to the USB TYPE A e Image files stored in the root directory of the USB memory device will be displayed for the scheduled Slideshow e Please refer to Troubleshooting in the Operating Guide in case scheduled functions events are not executed appropriately as you ve set 29 3 1 Projector Web Control continued 3 1 8 Date Time Settings Displays and configures the date and time settings a maue Eagan a dele ee eee et eee Set Pe g Hn o Item Description Current Date Configures the current date in year month day format Current Time Configures the current time in hour minute second format Click the ON check box to enable daylight savings time and set the following items Start Configures the date and time daylight savings time begins Month Configures the month daylight savings time begins 1 12 Week Configures the week of the month daylight savings time begins First 2 3 4 Last Configures the day of the week daylight savings time begins Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat hour Configures the hour daylight savings time begins 0 23 minute Configures the minute daylight savings time begins 0 59 d Configures the date and time daylight savings
259. ot malfunction e Point at RETURN in the dialog with the A V buttons and press the lt or ENTER button to return to the KEYSTONE menu 34 Using the magnify feature 4 Press the MAGNIFY ON button on the remote control The picture will be magnified and the MAGNIFY dialog will appear on the screen When the 23S E g o BOF ommo oe og b O gh DOEIDOO ON OFF buttons MAGNIFY ON button is pressed for the first time E MAGNIFY after the projector is turned on the picture will be zoomed by 1 5 times On the dialog triangle marks to show each direction will be displayed MAGNIFY ON S 2 The display magnification of the projector switches in order with every press of the MAGNIFY ON button O For computer signals HDMI RGB signals input signals from the LAN USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B ports 1 5 times gt 2 times gt 3 times gt 4 times gt 1 time e a O For video signals s video signals component video signals or HDMI Component signals 1 5 times gt 2 times gt 1 time a ee While the triangles are displayed on the dialog use the A W lt cursor buttons to shift the magnifying area Press the MAGNIFY OFF button on the remote control to exit magnification NOTE The MAGNIFY dialog will automatically disappear in several seconds with no operation The dialog will appear again if the MAGNIFY ON button is pressed when the dialog has au
260. other device communicating by the NETWORK BRIDGE and the HALF DUPLEX through the CONTROL port OFF 1s 2s 3s OFF Select this mode if it is not required to check the responses from the device that the projector sends data to In this mode the projector can send out data from the computer continuously 1s 2s 3s Select the time period to keep the projector waiting for response from the device SERVICE COMMUNICATION that the projector sends data to While waiting the continued continued response the projector does not send out any data from the CONTROL port This menu is available only when the NETWORK BRIDGE is selected for the COMMUNICATION TYPE and the HALF DUPLEX is selected for the TRANSMISSION METHOD E73 e OFF is selected as the default setting STACK Selecting this item displays the STACK menu For more information please see Instant Stack Guide e When STACK MODE is set to MAIN or SUB the other items in COMMUNICATION menu are invalid continued on next page 74 ltem scription INFORMATION Selecting this item displays a dialog titled INPUT_INFORMATION It shows the information about the current input e The FRAME LOCK message on the dialog means the frame lock function is working e The SCART RGB message means the COMPONENT ports are working as a SCART RGB input port Please refer to the SERVICE COMPONENT item in INPUT menu 450 continued e This
261. otocol takes a little time to obtain IP address from DHCP server e Auto IP function will be assigned an IP address if the projector could not obtain an IP address from server even if DHCP is ON Use the A W lt gt buttons to enter the IP ADDRESS This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF IP ADDRESS The IP ADDRESS is the number that identifies this projector on the network You cannot have two devices with the same IP ADDRESS on the same network e The IP ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 is prohibited Use the A W lt P gt buttons to enter the same SUBNET MASK used by your computer This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF e The SUBNET MASK 0 0 0 0 is prohibited Use the A lt P buttons to enter the DEFAULT GATEWAY a node on a computer network that DEFAULT serves as an access point to another network GATEWAY address This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF Use the A W lt P buttons to input the DNS server address The DNS server is a system to control domain names and IP addresses on the Network Use the A V buttons to enter the TIME DIFFERENCE Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one set on your computer If unsure consult your IT TIME manager DIFFERENCE Use the gt button to return to the menu after setting the TIME DIFFERENCE e When this item is set the same item in the WIRED SETUP menu is overwritten with the same setting C182 WIRELESS
262. ou can input video signals to the Y pin of the component video of COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 NOTES for Simple Stack e COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 can be used as the input port for the projector that is connected with a computer cable at its MONITOR OUT port LQOperating Guide Connection example SETUP menu If you wish to use other e E EEA SAE input ports input the image to Sub and Main individually Inputting image to Sub and Main individually 1 Split the output signal from your image device into two with device such as a signal splitter 2 Connect the output ports of the image output device to the same input ports on the Main and Sub projectors NOTES for Intellectual Stack LAN USB TYPE A and USB TYPE B cannot be used as the input ports on the Main projector in Intellectual Stack NOTES for Simple Stack Any of the ports that is compatible with the signal can be used Input the same signal to the two projectors individually 24 5 Setting input ports using menu 5 1 Preparing for menu operations If Simple Stack without an RS 232C connection is used press the button corresponding to the port on the remote control or the INPUT button on the projector to select the port to which the cable is connected For setting of MONITOR OUT refer to SETUP menu in Operating Guide
263. out 10 minutes or more after turning it off Also do not turn the projector off shortly after turning it on Such operations might cause the lamp to malfunction or shorten the lifetime of some parts including the lamp NOTE Turn the power on off in right order Please power on the projector prior to the connected devices e This projector has the function that can make the projector automatically turn on off Please refer to the DIRECT POWER ON 466 and AUTO POWER OFF E1166 items of the OPTION menu perating Adjusting the volume VOL A dialog will appear on the screen to aid you in huttors adjusting the volume If you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after a few seconds o 1 Use the VOL buttons to adjust the volume 7 NOTE When x is selected for current picture input port the volume adjustment is disabled Please see AUDIO SOURCE item of AUDIO menu 57 e Even if the projector is in the standby mode the volume is adjustable when both of the following conditions are true An option other than is selected for AUDIO OUT STANDBY in the AUDIO SOURCE item of the AUDIO menu 57 NORMAL is selected in the STANDBY MODE item of the SETUP menu 56 Temporarily turning off the screen and audio 1 _ Press AV MUTE button on the remote control it The BLANK screen will be displayed instead of 88 the screen of input signals and the sound from the si AV MUTE
264. ower cord for complete separation e Do not distribute the power supply to multiple devices Doing so may overload the outlet and connectors loosen the connection or result in fire electric shock or other accidents e Connect the ground terminal for the AC inlet of this unit to the ground terminal of the building using an appropriate power cord bundled NOTICE This product is also designed for IT power systems with a phase tophase voltage of 220 to 240 V 16 RENANG COMO Installing the batteries Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it If the remote control starts to malfunction try to replace the batteries If you will not use the remote control for long period remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place 4 Holding the hook part of the battery cover remove it 2 Align and insert the two AA batteries HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL ENERGY Part No LR6 or R6P according to their plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control 3 Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place AWARNING PAlways handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed Improper use may result in battery explosion cracking or leakage which could result in fire injury and or pollution of the surrounding environment e Be sure to use only the batteries specified Do not use batteries of different types at the same tim
265. pe authentication with an MD5 Message Digest 5 algorithm When the projector is connected to a LAN a random 8 bytes will be returned if authentication is enabled Bind this received 8 bytes and the authentication password and digest the data with the MD5 algorithm and add it in front of the commands to send Following is a sample of authentication process Authentication password password example Random 8 bytes a572f60c example 1 Select a projector and receive the random 8 bytes from the projector gt a572f60c 2 Bind the random 8 bytes and the authentication password gt a5 2f60cpassword 3 Digest this bound with MD5 algorithm gt e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde 4 Add this code in front of the commands and send the data gt e3d97429adffa11bce1f7275813d4bde command 5 When the sent data is correct the command will be performed and the reply data will be returned Otherwise an authentication error will be returned NOTE As for the transmission of the second or subsequent commands the authentication data can be omitted when the same connection 16 NGOKE Kors CONME This projector is equipped with NETWORK BRIDGE function When the projector connects to the computer by wired or wireles LAN communicaton an external device that is connected with this projector by RS 232C communication can be controlled from the computer as a network terminal For details see the 6 Network
266. ph of WARNING in this manual when a problem occurs with the equipment first refer to the Troubleshooting section of the Operating Guide and run through the suggested checks If this does not resolve the problem contact your dealer or service company They will tell you what warranty condition is applied A A Introduction sssssnsnnsnann 3 EASY MENU ssssss 42 FeatureS 0 00 3 Checking the contents of package 3 PRE MG Sie eee jii Part names 4 IMAGE menu 47 Projector Control panel and Indicators INPUT menu 2020000ee 50 eee SETUP menu 0200005 54 Setting UP ssss 7 Arrangement 2 0005 7 AUDIO menu 554555 37 Connecting with your devices 10 SCREEN menu 008 5 59 PA ET E e OPTION menu 65 Fastening the adapter cover 15 Using the security bar and slot 15 NETWORK menu 76 Connecting to a power supply 16 SECURITY menu 87 Remote control 08005 17 Presentation tools 94 Installing the batteries 17 PC LESS Presentation 94 Using the REMOTE ID function 17 Thumbnail Mode Full Screen Mode Changing the frequency of remote control signal 18 Ee a snr Playlist 104 About the remote control signal 18 seit ieee eR OG pa a Using as a simple PC mouse amp keyboard 19 Using the eee g fun toh Status Monitor 20 USB Display
267. projector For details contact your dealer continued on next page 50 ltem scription The video format for S VIDEO port and VIDEO port can be set 1 Use the A V buttons to FOR select the input port 2 Using the lt gt buttons switches the mode for video format VIDEO FORMAT AUTO NTSC amp PAL SECAM N PAL amp M PAL amp NTSC4 43 lt 4 e This item is performed only for a video signal from the VIDEO port or the S VIDEO port e The AUTO mode automatically selects the optimum mode e The AUTO operation may not work well for some signals If the picture becomes unstable e g an irregular picture lack of color please select the mode according to the input signal The video format of HDMI input signals from the HDMI 1 and 2 ports can be set aa Faas 1 Use the A buttons to Sar bye ae niini select the HDMI port to be OMi 2 a o ee set 2 Use the lt buttons to select the video format gt gt HDMI FORMAT AUTO VIDEO COMPUTER AUTO automatically sets the optimum mode VIDEO sets the suitable mode for DVD signals COMPUTER sets the suitable mode for computer signals e When the COMPUTER is selected the functions COLOR PICTURE menu TINT PICTURE menu and OVER SCAN IMAGE menu are unavailable The digital range of HDMI input signals from the HDMI 1 and 2 ports can be set E Ho RACE 1 Use the A V buttons to a ae aii ete select the HDMI port to be ee 2 ear set 2 U
268. putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover and the projector together slide the lamp r cover back in place Then firmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover 7 Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the V A button then press the gt button 3 Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu using the V A button then press the gt button 4 Point at the LAMP TIME using the V A button then press the gt button A dialog will appear 5 Press the button to select OK on the dialog It performs resetting the lamp time Sa SSS SESS r ACAUTION gt Do not touch the interior of the projector while the lamp is taken out NOTE Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp for a suitable indication about the lamp 13 Replacing the lamp continued A HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE AAWARNING P The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp The lamp can break with a loud bang or burn out if jolted or scratched handled while hot or worn over time Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them In addition if the bulb bursts it is possible for s
269. pyrights for each of such software modules e Be sure to read End User License Agreement for the Projector Software which is separated document 128 Projector CP X8150 CP X8160 CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 User s Manual detailed Network Guide Thank you for purchasing this product This manual is intended to explain only the network function For proper use of this product please refer to this manual and the other manuals for this product Features This projector has the network function that brings you the following main features v Network Presentation allows the projector to project computer images transmitted through a network 415 Y Web Control allows you to monitor and control the projector through a network from a computer L416 v My Image allows the projector to store up to four still images and project them 150 v Messenger allows the projector to display text sent from a computer through a network 51 v Network Bridge allows you to control an external device through the projector from a computer L452 NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice e The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual e The reproduction transfer or copy of all or any part of this document is not permitted without express written consent Trademark acknowledgment e Microsoft Internet Explorer
270. r 5 User s manuals Book x1 CD x1 6 Security label 7 Application CD 8 Adapter cover AWARNING P Keep small parts away from children and pets Take care not to put in the mouth If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment NOTE Keep the original packing materials for future reshipment Be sure to use the original packing materials when moving the projector Use special caution for the lens e The projector may make a rattling sound when tilted moved or shaken since a flap to control the air flow inside of the projector has moved Be aware that this is not a failure or malfunction Preparing for the remote control Please insert the batteries into the remote control before using it If the remote control starts to malfunction try to replace the batteries If you will not use the remote control for long period remove the batteries from the remote control and store them in a safe place 1 Holding the hook part of the battery cover remove it 2 Align and insert the two AA batteries HITACHI MAXELL or HITACHI MAXELL ENERGY Part No LR6 or R6P according to their plus and minus terminals as indicated in the remote control 3 Replace the battery cover in the direction of the arrow and snap it back into place AWARNING P Always handle the batteries with care and use them only as directed Improper use may result in battery explosion cracking or leakage which could result
271. r change the air filter referring to the section Cleaning and replacing the air filter After cleaning or changing the air filter please be sure to reset the filter timer After the remedy reset the power to ON There is a possibility that the interior portion has become overcooled Please use the unit within the usage temperature parameters 0 C to 40 C or 45 C User s Manual concise After the treatment reset the power to ON At least 1 Power ON schedule is saved to the projector Please refer to 3 1 7 Schedule Settings in the Network Guide 121 Regarding the indicator lamps continued NOTE When the interior portion has become overheated for safety purposes the projector is automatically shut down and the indicator lamps may also be turned off In such a case disconnect the power cord and wait at least 45 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover and then turn the power on again For the SECURITY indicator see SECURITY INDICATOR in the SECURITY menu 1193 For the SHADE indicator see the section Temporarily shading the screen 0136 The FILTER indicator shows the condition of the air filter Utilize this feature to keep the interior of the projector in good condition Turned off The air filter is clean No need to clean up The air filter is going to be choked Lighting In Orange It is recomme
272. r the Kensington lock For details see the manual of the security Anti theft tool chain or wire security bar NOTE The security bar and slot is not comprehensive theft prevention measures It is intended to be used as supplemental theft prevention measure e The safety bar M4 can be used for the same purpose as the security bar 15 Connecting to a power supply 4 Put the connector of the power cord into the AC IN AC IN AC inlet of the projector n ower 2 Firmly plug the power cord s plug into the cord outlet In a couple of seconds after the power supply connection the POWER indicator will A 55 Tmt light up in steady orange sso Heep O I HHH Please remember that when the DIRECT POWER ON 7 function activated L66 the connection of the power supply make the projector turn on AWARNING PDo not connect the projector to a power supply while no lens unit is attached to it gt Please use extra caution when connecting the power cord as incorrect or faulty connections may result in fire and or electrical shock e Do not touch the power cord with a wet hand e Only use the power cord that came with the projector If it is damaged consult your dealer to get a new one Never modify the power cord e Only plug the power cord into an outlet whose voltage is matched to the power cord The power outlet should be close to the projector and easily accessible Remove the p
273. r buttons r 9 z MENU i button RESET button INPUT ESC button button 1 To start the MENU press the MENU button The MENU you last used EASY or ADVANCED will appear EASY MENU has priority to appear just after powered on 2 In the EASY MENU 1 Use the A cursor buttons to select an item to operate If you want to change it to the ADVANCED MENU select the ADVANCED MENU 2 Use the lt gt cursor buttons to operate the item In the ADVANCED MENU 1 Use the A V cursor buttons to select a menu If you want to change it to the EASY MENU select the EASY MENU The items in the menu appear on the right side 2 Press the cursor button or ENTER button to move the cursor to the right side Then use the A V cursor buttons to select an item to operate and press the cursor button or ENTER button to progress The operation menu or dialog of the selected item will appear 3 Use the buttons as instructed in the OSD to operate the item continued on next page 39 Using the menu function continued 3 To close the MENU press the MENU button again or select EXIT and press the lt cursor button or ENTER button Even if you do not do anything the dialog will automatically disappear after about 30 seconds NOTE If you want to move the menu position use the cursor buttons after pressing the POSITION button e Some functions cannot be
274. r on its side front or rear position e Do not attach nor place anything on the projector unless otherwise specified in the manual e Do not use any mounting accessories except the accessories specified by the manufacturer Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used e For special installation such as ceiling mounting be sure to consult your dealer beforehand e Only for CP X8160 CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 it is possible to install the projector for any direction with specified mounting accessories Consult with your dealer about such a special installation e Place your hands on the grip on the bottom of the projector when carrying the projector Remove all the attachments including the power cord and cables from the projector when carrying the projector gt Do not install the projector near thermally conductive or flammable things Such things when heated by the projector could result in a fire and burns e Do not place the projector on a metal stand gt Do not place the projector where any oils such as cooking or machine oil are used Oil may harm the product resulting in malfunction or falling from the mounted position gt Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet Getting the projector wet or inserting liquid into the projector could cause a fire and an electric shock and damage the projector e Do not place the projector near water such as in a bathroom kitchen or poolside e Do not plac
275. radation or other problems e Do not place the projector in a smoking area kitchen passageway or by the window NOTICE Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector s remote sensor e Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused e Set the ALTITUDE of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu correctly It is recommended to leave it at AUTO usually 1169 If the projector is used with a wrong setting it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside e Keep heat sensitive things away from the projector Otherwise they may be damaged by the heat from the projector Connecting with your devices Before connecting the projector to a device consult the manual of the device to confirm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare the required accessories such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged After making sure that the projector and the devices are turned off perform the connection according to the following instructions Refer to the figures in subsequent pages Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to read Network Guide too NOTE Do not turn on or off the projector while connected to a device in operation unless that is directed in the manual of the device Otherwise it may cause malf
276. res the text of the e mail to be sent The length of the text can be up to 1024 alphanumeric Mail Text characters but if you are using some of special characters below the length may be shorter Special characters amp and space Except Cold Start and Authentication Failure Alarm Time Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The trigger of Filter Error e mail is depending on the FILTER MESSAGE setting in the SERVICE item of the OPTION menu which defines the period until the filter message is displayed on the projector screen An e mail will be sent when the usage time of the filter exceeds the time limit that is set No notification e mail will be sent if the FILTER MESSAGE is set to TURN OFF OPTION menu in the Operating Guide e Lamp Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e mail notification reminder of the lamp time When the lamp hour exceeds the limit that is configured in the Projector Web Control an e mail will be sent e Filter Time Alarm is defined as a threshold for e mail notification reminder of the filter time When the filter hour exceeds the limit that is configured in the Projector Web Control an e mail will be sent e Filter Status Notification can be enabled for both or either one of Status 1 and 2 These notifications are equivalent to the changing of the FILTER indicator on the projector Status 1 off to orange Status 2 orange to red Refer to the Operating Guide for detail
277. ress the ON gt button to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 1 2 Use the A V buttons on the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu to select ON The Rigi ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small will Se be displayed 0e 1 3 Use the A gt buttons to enter the ENTER NEW PASSWORD password Move the cursor to the right side box small of the ENTER NEW PASSWORD box small and press the gt button to display the NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and then enter the same password again 1 4 Move the cursor to the right side of the RETURN i MY TEXT PASSWORD MEY PASSWORD AGAIN MY TEXT NEW PASSWORD AGAIN box and press ae PASSWORD gt button to display the NOTE NEW PASSWORD box for about 30 seconds then C AE please make note of the password during NOTE NEW PASSWORD ooo this time Pressing the ENTER button on the remote control or button on the projector will return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 2 Turning off the MY TEXT PASSWORD 2 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 2 2 Select OFF to display the ENTER PASSWORD box large Enter the aii registered password and the screen will ring Co 01 2345 6789 return to the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu ENTER PASSWORD box If an incorrect password is input the menu will close large If necessary repeat the process from 2 1 3 If you have forgotten your password 3 1 Follow the procedure in 1 1 to display the MY TEXT PASSWORD on off menu 3 2
278. ress the RESET button or press the lt and INPUT button at the same time Also if you move the cursor to DELETE or ALL CLEAR on screen and press the ENTER or INPUT button 1 character or all characters will ma be erased The name can be a maximum EnEn SOURCE NAME of 16 characters continued 7 To change an already inserted character press the A button to move the cursor to the first line and use the lt gt buttons to move the cursor on the character to be ES changed eo After pressing the ENTER or INPUT button the character is selected Then follow the same procedure as described at the item 6 above 8 To finish entering text move the cursor to the OK on screen and press the gt ENTER or INPUT button To revert to the previous name without saving changes move the cursor to the CANCEL on screen and press the lt ENTER or INPUT button Using the A V cursor buttons switches the mode for the template screen Press the cursor or the ENTER button to display the selected template and press the lt cursor button to close the displayed screen The last selected template is displayed when the MY BUTTON allocated to the TEMPLATE function is pressed R468 re TEST PATTERN DOT LINE1 amp DOT LINE2 gt DOT LINE3 g g STACK amp MAP2 amp MAP1 amp CIRCLE2 amp CIRCLE1 amp DOT LINE4 You can turn a map upside down and scroll it horizontally when MAP1 or MAP2 is selected To invert or scroll the map display
279. rk Presentation refer to the Network Guide and the manual for LiveViewer PC LESS Presentation The PC LESS Presentation reads image and audio data from the storage media inserted into the USB TYPE A ports and displays the image in the following modes The PC LESS Presentation can be started by selecting the USB TYPE A as the input source This feature allows you to make your presentations without using your computer Thumbnail mode 2195 Full Screen mode 199 Slideshow mode 4101 Supported storage media e USB memory USB memory type USB hard disk and USB card reader type NOTE Some USB memory devices and or USB hubs may not operate properly e USB devices with security software may not work e Be careful when inserting or removing a USB device L412 97 Supported format e FAT12 FAT16 and FAT32 NOTE NTFS is not supported Supported file format and its extension e JPEG jpeg jpg Progressive is not supported e Bitmap bmp 16bit mode and compressed bitmap is not supported e PNG png Interlace PNG is not supported e GIF gif e Movie avi mov Supported video format Motion JPEG Supported audio format WAV Linear PCM Stereo 16bit IMA ADPCM continued on next page 94 PC LESS Presentation continued NOTE Files with a resolution larger than the following are not supported CP X8150 CP X8160 1024 x 768 Still 768 x 576 Movie CP WX8240 CP WX8255 1280 x 8
280. rks as an input port that receives image signals from the computer 4109 e It may take several seconds to project the images from the USB USB TYPEB TYPEB port e In the following cases a message to notify you that USB TYPE B port is not available for picture input appears together with the USB TYPE B dialog This setting is switched to MOUSE while a picture input from the USB TYPE B port is projected The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input source while this setting is set to MOUSE Select USB DISPLAY in the dialog to project the picture input to the USB TYPE B port In this case you cannot use the simple mouse and keyboard function Otherwise select other port for picture input The lamp time is the usage time of the lamp counted after the last resetting It is shown in the OPTION menu Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or the button of the projector displays a dialog To reset the lamp time select the OK using the gt button LAMP TIME CANCEL gt OK e Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp for a suitable indication about the lamp e For the lamp replacement see the section Replacing the lamp 113 e The lamp time can be checked also with the Status Monitor on CP X8160 CP WX8255 CP WU8450 Q122 The filter time is the usage time of the air filter counted after the last resetting It is shown in the OPTION menu Pressing the RESET button on the remote control or
281. rojector is suspended from a ceiling This is dangerous since if the lamp s bulb has broken the shards will fall out when the cover is opened In addition working in high places is dangerous so ask your local dealer to have the lamp replaced even if the bulb is not broken e Do not use the projector with the lamp cover removed At the lamp replacing make sure that the screws are screwed in firmly Loose screws could result in damage or injury e Use only the lamp of the specified type Use of a lamp that does not meet the lamp specifications for this model could cause a fire damage or shorten the life of this product e If the lamp breaks soon after the first time it is used it is possible that there are electrical problems elsewhere besides the lamp If this happens consult your local dealer or a service representative e Handle with care jolting or scratching could cause the lamp bulb to burst during use e Using the lamp for long periods of time could cause it dark not to light up or to burst When the pictures appear dark or when the color tone is poor please replace the lamp as soon as possible Do not use old used lamps this is a cause of breakage Cleaning and replacing the air filter Please check and clean the air filter periodically When the indicators or a message prompts you to clean the air filter comply with it as soon as possible The filter unit with 2 sheets of filters is inside of the filter cover In addi
282. rojector is used with a wrong setting it may cause damage to the projector itself or the parts inside For details see User s Manual Operating Guide Connecting with your devices Before connecting the projector to a device consult the manual of the device to confirm that the device is suitable for connecting with this projector and prepare the required accessories such as a cable in accord with the signal of the device Consult your dealer when the required accessory did not come with the product or the accessory is damaged After making sure that the projector and the devices are turned off perform the connection according to the following instructions Refer to figures F 1 to F 4 at the back of this manual For details see User s Manual Operating Guide Before connecting the projector to a network system be sure to read User s Manual Network Guide too L mr O Z LL AAWARNING P Use only the appropriate accessories Otherwise it could cause a fire or damage the projector and devices e Use only the accessories specified or recommended by the projector s manufacturer It may be regulated under some standard e Neither disassemble nor modify the projector and the accessories e Do not use the damaged accessory Be careful not to damage the accesso ries Route a cable so that it is neither stepped on nor pinched out gt Heat may build up in the USB wireless adapter to avoid possible burns dis connect th
283. rol and via Web Control at the same time It may cause some operational errors in the projector e If Crestron e Control in the Network Settings 121 is set to Disable the selection window above does not appear but the Logon window of the Projector Web Control is displayed e Crestron e Control is created using Flash You need to install Adobe Flash Player on your computer to use Crestron e Control 16 3 1 Projector Web Control 3 1 1 Logon To use the Projector Web Control function you need mm x to logon with your user name and password Moe oe Warning Thr server i eequeting that your guerre and pavieced Ee sent inan inaecure manner beac suthentication without a secure Gdetere trib j Li iit i Below are the factory default settings for user name and password Passed ds Remernber my cxediertiah Username Password _ ii Administrator Enter your user name and password and then click the OK If you logon successfully the screen below will be displayed Main menu Click the desired operation or configuration item on the main menu NOTE The language used on the Projector Web Control screen is the same as that of the OSD on the projector If you want to change it you need to change the OSD language on the projector SCREEN menu in the Operating Guide 17 3 1 Projector Web Control continued 3 1 2 Network Information Displays the project
284. row lens Mounting accessory HAS 8150 Bracket for fixing mount HAS 204L Standard adaptor for fixing mount HAS 304H Long adaptor for fixing mount USB wireless adapter USB WL 11N For more information please consult your dealer ENGLISH i Troubleshooting Warranty and after service lf an abnormal operation Such as smoke strange odor or excessive sound should occur stop using the projector immediately Otherwise if a problem occurs with the projector first refer to Troubleshooting of User s Manual Operating Guide Instant Stack Guide and Network Guide and run through the suggested checks If this does not resolve the problem please consult your dealer or service company They will tell you what warranty condition is applied Please check the following web address where you may find the latest information for this projector Product information and http www hitachi america us digitalmedia Manuals Production afo maloni http www hitachidigitalmedia com Direct link to http www hitachiserviceeu com support guides manual download userguides htm NOTE The information in this manual is subject to change without notice e The illustrations shown in this manual are one example for explanation On your projector there may be some differences from the illustrations e The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this manual e The reproduction transfer or copy
285. rt the new lamp and retighten firmly the 3 6 l screws of the lamp that are loosened in the previous process to lock it in place While putting the interlocking parts of the lamp cover and the projector together slide the lamp cover back in place Then firmly fasten the screw of the lamp cover Turn the projector on and reset the lamp time using the LAMP TIME item in the OPTION menu 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the ADVANCED MENU in the menu using the V A button then press the gt button 3 Point at the OPTION in the left column of the menu using the V A button then press the gt button D 4 Point at the LAMP TIME using the W A button then press the gt button A dialog will appear 5 Press the button to select OK on the dialog It performs resetting the lamp time NOTE Please reset the lamp time only when you have replaced the lamp for a suitable indication about the lamp 113 Replacing the lamp continued Lamp warning A HIGH VOLTAGE HIGH TEMPERATURE HIGH PRESSURE AWARNING gt The projector uses a high pressure mercury glass lamp The lamp can break with a loud bang or burn out if jolted or scratched handled while hot or worn over time Note that each lamp has a different lifetime and some may burst or burn out soon after you start using them In addition if the bulb bursts it is possible for shards of glass to f
286. rwise clear the check box 5 Click the Enable check box to open Network Control Port2 Port 9715 to use TCP 9715 Click the Enable check box for the Authentication setting when authentication is required otherwise clear the check box 6 Click the Apply button to save the settings 62 7 4 Command Control via the Network continued When the authentication setting is enabled the following settings are required 32 7 Click the Security Settings on the main menu 8 Click the Network Control and enter the desired authentication password See NOTE 9 Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The Authentication Password will be the same for Network Control Port1 Port 23 Network Control Port2 Port 9715 PJLink Port Port 4352 My Image Port Port 9716 and Messenger Port Port 9719 e The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection You can restart the network connection from Network Restart on the main menu E2141 63 7 4 Command Control via the Network continued Command Format Command formats differ among the different communication ports e TCP 23 You can use the RS 232C commands without any changes The reply data format is the same as the RS 232C commands ELIRS 232C Communication in the Operating Guide Technical However the following reply
287. s and press the gt cursor button or ENTER button to execute the item Then perform it according to the EASY MENU following table at COMPUTER INT 1024 x 788 50Hz ptem scription BRIGHTNESS Using the Bis buttons adjusts the brightness Dark Light 7 x CONTRAST Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the contrast Weak Strong Using the A V buttons switches the gamma mode 1 DEFAULT amp 1 CUSTOM 2 DEFAULT 2 CUSTOM 3 DEFAULT gt gt 7 CUSTOM 3 CUSTOM gt gt 7 DEFAULT 4 DEFAULT gt gt 6 CUSTOM 6 DEFAULT 5 CUSTOM 5 DEFAULT 4 CUSTOM To adjust CUSTOM Selecting a mode whose name includes CUSTOM and then pressing the button or the ENTER button displays a dialog to aid you in adjusting the mode This function is useful when you want to change the brightness of particular tones Choose an item using the lt gt buttons GAMMA and adjust the level using the A V buttons You can display a test pattern for checking the effect of your adjustment by pressing the ENTER button Te Each time you press the ENTER button the pattern changes as below No pattern gt Gray scale of 9 steps itiiti ft Ramp Gray scale of 15 steps The eight equalizing bars correspond to eight tone levels of the test pattern Gray scale of 9 steps except the darkest in the left end If you want to adjust the 2nd tone from left end on the test pattern use the equalizing adjustment bar 1 The darkest tone at the left end
288. s being applied Please wait for a while e Pressing the lt button functioning as NO key in the dialog closes the dialog without saving the setting STACK menu settings 3 Important information for Intellectual Stack This section provides important information for setting up the Main and Sub projectors not explanations on operating the menus Read all information carefully e To use Intellectual Stack one projector must be set to Main and the other set to Sub e All buttons except the STANDBY ON button on the control panel of the Sub projector are disabled Operate the projectors with the control panel of the Main projector or the remote control e Pressing the STANDBY ON button of the Sub projector does not allow you to turn off only the Sub projector The Main and Sub projectors turn off when the button is pressed for more than 3 seconds And pressing the button does not turn on the Main or Sub projector e The Main projector is capable of receiving the remote control signals but not the Sub projector so the remote control should be pointed at the Main projector e lt Only for CP X8160 CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 gt Each Status Monitor can also be operated individually from the respective control panel of the Main and Sub projectors Only the monitor on the projector that has been turned on can be operated with the remote control e f a wired remote control is used connect the cable to the Main projector instead of the Sub pr
289. s byte length 0x0D Fixed RS 232C commands Refer to RS 232C Communication command format 11 Check Sum This is the value to make zero on the addition of the lower 8 bits from the header to the checksum Connection ID Random value from 0 to 255 This value is attached to the reply data NOTE Operation cannot be guaranteed when the projector receives an undefined command or data e Provide an interval of at least 40ms between the response code and any other code e Commands are not accepted during warm up 2 Response code Error code h shows hexadecimal The connection ID is attached for the TCP 23 s response error codes are used The connection ID is same as the sending command format 1 ACK reply 06h xxh xxh connection ID 2 NAK reply 15h xxh Error reply 1Ch 0000h xxh Data reply 1Dh xxxxh xxh Authentication error reply 1Fh 0400h xxh Projector busy reply 1Fh xxxxh xxh When the projector is too busy to receives the command the projector returens the error code In such a case check the sending code and send the same command again 3 4 5 6 Automatic Connection Break The TCP connection will be automatically disconnected after there is no communication for 30 seconds after being established Authentication The projector does not accept commands without authentication success when authentication is enabled The projector uses a challenge response ty
290. s of the FILTER indicator 26 3 1 Projector Web Control continued 3 1 7 Schedule Settings Displays and configures schedule settings z es a Configures the daily schedule Configures the Sunday schedule Configures the Monday schedule Tuesday Configures the Tuesday schedule Wednesday Configures the Wednesday schedule Thursday Configures the Thursday schedule Friday Configures the Friday schedule Saturday Configures the Saturday schedule Specific date No 1 Configures the specific date No 1 schedule Specific date No 2 Configures the specific date No 2 schedule Specific date No 4 Configures the specific date No 4 schedule Specific date No 3 Configures the specific date No 3 schedule Specific date No 5 Configures the specific date No 5 schedule 27 3 1 Projector Web Control Schedule Settings continued The schedule settings are shown below Item Description Schedule Click the Enable check box to enable the schedule Configures the month and date Date Month Day This item appears only when Specific date No 1 5 is selected Click the Apply button to save the settings The current event settings are displayed on the schedule list To add additional functions and events set the following items Item Description Time Configures the time to execute commands Command Parameter Configures the commands to
291. s point to another network GATEWAY _ address This function can only be used when DHCP is set to OFF Use the A 4 gt buttons to input the DNS server address The DNS server is a system to control domain names and IP addresses on the Network DNS SERVER continued on next page 81 ltem scription Use the A V buttons to enter the TIME DIFFERENCE Set the same TIME DIFFERENCE as the one set on your computer If unsure consult your IT TIME manager DIFFERENCE Use the gt button to return to the menu after setting the TIME DIFFERENCE e When this item is set the same item in the WIRELESS SETUP menu is overwritten with the same setting 77 WIRED SETUP Use the A lt P buttons to enter the Year last continued two digits Month Date Hour and Minute e When this item is set the same item in the WIRELESS SETUP menu is overwritten with the same setting 478 DATE AND The projector will override this setting and retrieve TIME DATE AND TIME information from the Time server when SNTP is enabled 3 1 8 Date Time Settings in the Network Guide e This setting will be reset if the projector is turned off while STANDBY MODE in the SETUP menu is set to SAVING 2156 or when the AC power is turned off Selecting this item displays the WIRED INFORMATION dialog for viewing the wired LAN settings fe WRED INFORMATION PASSCODE DOOU D000 0000 PROJECTOR MAME Projector_Nane IP ADDRESS 182
292. se the lt gt buttons to select the digital range AUTO amp NORMAL ENHANCED ia AUTO automatically sets the optimum mode NORMAL sets the suitable mode for DVD signals 16 235 ENHANCED sets the suitable mode for computer signals 0 255 e If the contrast of the screen image is too strong or too weak try finding a more suitable mode continued on next page 51 ltem scription The computer input signal type for COMPUTER IN1 and IN2 ports can be set 1 Use the A F buttons to select the COMPUTER IN port to be set 2 Use the lt gt buttons to select GEER z the computer input signal type 7 AUTO amp SYNC ON G OFF COMPUTER IN 2 e Selecting the AUTO mode allows you to input a sync on G signal or component video signal from the port e In the AUTO mode the picture may be distorted with certain input signals In such a case remove the signal connector so that COMPUTER IN no signal is received and select the SYNC ON G OFF and then reconnect the signal Set the frame lock function on off for each port 1 Use the A V buttons to select TE FRAME LOCK the input ports COMPUTER IN 1 2 Use the lt gt buttons to turn the DaI frame lock function on off as ON amp OFF e This item can be performed only on a signal with a vertical frequency of 49 to 51Hz 59 to 61 Hz e When ON is selected moving pictures are displayed more smoothly FRAME LOCK continued on next page 52 ltem
293. setup information including usage time Use the lt gt buttons to switch display SETT e by TUTTLE TEU UO CUATRO ETE TOUIUOLOMRUO UTS UTROLE TOTO TOO OEUO UOC TUTOR TOO TOO OUA UAU OKA CUTLER NOU ANO AOU ANO AUU UA OUA UOA OKA NAU OONA KO TOOT F E Of om0 00 el e aOOOE OKEE D a Bj o0 OO DO OH ie vy A FUNCTION O FUNCTION button Usage time The Status Monitor displays the lamp time usage time of the present Lamp Hady Lamp time lamp the filter time usage time of the air PUCTERAMZBBE hi Filter time filter and the projector usage time SYSTEM 22386 h Projector usage time Usage time example Network information The network information is displayed over three pages Use the A V buttons to switch the page Displayed information in each page is as below ATTIC 2nd page Subnet mask _ IP ADDRESS wireless and wired W192168002196 Wireless 1st page IP address N192168001075 Wired wireless and wired Network information example Default gateway wireless and wired 3rd page K T continued on next page 22 Displaying the log continued NOTE The Status Monitor and its backlight returns to the first state before the FUNCTION or ENTER button was pressed when any button except cursor buttons is pressed or after about 30 seconds without button operation e The proje
294. sing the CD manual 05 17 Connecting with your devices 7 Specifications secsosccuwewncacandevecadeseaneden 18 Fastening the adapter cover 8 Troubleshooting Warranty and after service 20 First of all Entries and graphical symbols explanation The following entries and graphical symbols are used for the manuals and the product as follows for safety purpose Please know their meanings beforehand and heed them AWARNING This entry warns of a risk of serious personal injury or even death ACAUTION This entry warns of a risk of personal injury or physical damage NOTICE This entry notices of fear of causing trouble Important safety instruction The followings are important instructions for safely using the product Be sure to follow them always when handling the product The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage caused by mishandling that is beyond normal usage defined in these manuals of this projector AAWARNING P Never use the product in or after an abnormality ex giving off smoke smelling strange took a liquid or an object inside broken etc If an abnormality should occur unplug the projector urgently gt Situate the product away from children and pets gt Keep small parts away from children and pets If swallowed consult a physician immediately for emergency treatment gt Do not use the product when there is fear of a thunderbolt gt Unplug
295. t 4 The projector is inclined at about 35 degrees or over e This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR 90 is ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT 833 34 Using the lt gt buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion Shrink the bottom of the image Shrink the top of the image e The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs For some input this function may not work well KEYSTONE When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE telephoto focus this function may be excessive This function should be used when the zoom adjustment is set to the full WIDE wide angle focus whenever possible e This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR 290 is ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT 133 34 continued on next page 54 ltem scription Using the lt gt buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion Shrink the right of the image Shrink the left of the image e The adjustable range of this function will vary among inputs For KEYSTONE some input this function may not work well e When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center this function may not work well e This function is unavailable when the TRANSITION DETECTOR 290 is ON or the screen is adjusted by PERFECT FIT 133 34 Selecting this item displays the PERFECT FIT dialog For details PERFECT FIT see PREECE in Correcting the distortion 433
296. t according to the following table for selected port ps ttem scription Using the A V buttons switches the mode for aspect ratio For a computer signal CP X8150 CP X8160 NORMAL 4 3 16 9 16 10 CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 NORMAL 4 3 16 9 16 10 NATIVE es For an HDMI signal CP X8150 CP X8160 NORMAL 4 3 16 9 16 10 14 9 e CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 NORMAL 4 3 16 9 16 10 14 9 NATIVE ASPECT For a video signal s video signal or component video signal CP X8150 CP X8160 4 3 amp 16 9 14 9 iE CP SX8350 4 3 16 9 amp 14 9 NATIVE CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 4 3 16 9 16 10 14 9 NATIVE ee For an input signal from the LAN USB TYPE A or USB TYPE B ports or if there is no signal CP X8150 CP X8160 CP SX8350 4 3 fixed CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 16 10 fixed e The NORMAL mode keeps the original aspect ratio of the signal continued on next page 47 ltem scription Using the lt gt buttons adjusts the over scan ratio Small It magnifies picture Large It reduces picture e This item can be selected only for a video s video and component video signal OVER SCAN e For an HDMI signal this item can also be selected if
297. t input signal source Blank On Off Displays the current BLANK screen on off status Mute Displays the current audio mute on off status Freeze Displays the current Freeze status Shade Displays the current Shade status 3 1 13 Network Restart Sse Restarts the projector s network connection atyre sie mg g e nM oH ht ae t Item Description Restarts the projector s network connection in order to activate new configuration settings Restart NOTE Restarting requires you to re log on in order to further control or configure the projector via a web browser Wait 30 seconds or more after clicking the Restart button to log on again 3 2 Crestron e Control Tab Computer in 1 The Main window as shown above is displayed at first However if you have enabled User Password on the Tools window 146 a dialog prompting you to enter the password as shown on the right will be displayed and no operation is enabled until you have entered the password After entering the preset password the dialog disappears and the Main window will be displayed As shown below you can open a window by clicking the corresponding tab at the top right User Password dialog of the window Tab ipti Logs out from e Contro This tab appears only when User Password of the Tools window is enabled Opens Tools window 445 Info Opens Info window 147 Contact IT Help Op
298. t of het gebruik van dit document is niet toegestaan zonder uitdrukkelijke toestemming van de betreffende partij NOTA As informa es contidas neste manual est o sujeitas a altera es sem aviso pr vio e O fabricante n o se responsabiliza por quaisquer erros que possam surgir neste manual e A reprodu o transmiss o ou utiliza o deste documento ou do seu conte do n o permitida sem autoriza o expressa por escrito WAE ARP PHRHARAARRAMAMRERE KEMARA NAE RRRA a EAE RAFAJ EREHE BRIERE QFE e Aol INEO UE LSe OD gol HBH Uol UAH e ERE AZERE o Q1O4MO JIR LRO CHIA VO HUE RIZ HALE BA So UH SS uya Sos SA FHA HASH ASSE AS VO RLC NOTERA Informationen i denna bruksanvisning kan komma att ndras utan f rvarning Tillverkaren p tar sig inget ansvar f r eventuella fel i denna bruksanvisning Atergivning vers ndande eller anv ndning av detta dokument eller dess inneh ll r inte till ten utan uttrycklig skriftligt medgivande NPUAMEYAHME Cogepxanne DaHHOoro pyKOBOACTBa MOXKET N3MEHATbCA 6e3 NpegBapnTenbHOoro yBegomneunua Iponz3BognTenb HE HECET OTBETCTBEHHOCTH 3a OLUNOKM B DAHHOM PYKOBOACTBE e Bocnpou3sBeneHnue nepegaya n ncnonb3oBaHne DAaHHOrO AOKYMeHTa nnn ero copepxaHnsa 3aNpPeLIEHO 6e3 NUCbMeHHOrO paspelWeHua HUOM Taman ohjekirjan tiedot voivat muuttua ilman eri ilmoitusta Valmistaja ei ota mit n vastuuta ohjekirjassa mahdollisesti olevista virheist Dokumentin tai
299. ta Nam ration T Header CRC ee Header one Action Type eating cede NORMAL BE EF STANDBY Set SAVING BE EF sea Get BE EF COMPUTER IN1 BE EF MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF COMPUTER IN1 FF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF BE EF 01 00 B4 20 FF 00 BE EF 00 00 BE EF 00 00 BE EF 04 00 BE EF FF 00 BE EF 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 01 00 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 04 00 USB TYPEA OFF BE EF 01 00 FF 00 et BE EF 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 01 00 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 04 00 USB TYPE B OFF BE EF 01 00 FF 00 et BE EF 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 01 00 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 04 00 OFF BE EF 01 00 FF 00 et BE EF 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 01 00 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 04 00 OFF BE EF 01 00 FF 00 et BE EF 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 01 00 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 04 00 COMPONENT OFF BE EF FF 00 et BE EF 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 01 00 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 04 00 FF BE EF FF 00 et BE EF 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 04 00 FF BE EF FF 00 et BE EF 03 06 00 F1 F5 02 00 B1 20 00 00 COMPUTER IN1 BE EF 00 00 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 BE EF 04 00 STANDBY OFF BE EF FF 00 Get BE EF 00 00 Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 O e COMPUTER IN1 MONITOR OUT Set COMPUTER IN2 COMPUTER IN2 FF e COMPUTER IN1 MON
300. te control Incorrect care could have adverse influence such as discoloration peeling paint etc 1 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool sufficiently 2 After making sure that the projector is cool adequately lightly wipe with gauze or a soft cloth If the projector is extremely dirty dip soft cloth in water or a neutral cleaner diluted in water and wipe lightly after wringing well Then wipe lightly with a soft dry cloth AWARNING P Before caring make sure the power cord is not plugged in and then allow the projector to cool sufficiently The care in a high temperature state of the projector could cause a burn and or malfunction to the projector gt Never try to care for the inside of the projector personally Doing is so dangerous gt Avoid wetting the projector or inserting liquids in the projector It could result in a fire an electric shock and or malfunction to the projector e Do not put anything containing water cleaners or chemicals near the projector e Do not use aerosols or sprays L CAUTION Pp Please take right care of the projector according to the following Incorrect care could cause not only an injury but adverse influence such as discoloration peeling paint etc gt Do not use cleaners or chemicals other than those specified in this manual gt Do not polish or wipe with hard objects NOTICE gt Do not directly touch the lens surface with hands Nir
301. temperature change vibration or shock caused by hitting the projector Install the projectors in a stable environment when using Instant Stack If the image positions are shifted readjust the images M6 8 77 e The image positions may shift over time due to the tension and the weight of the connecting cables Make sure not to impose any load on the projectors when arranging the cables e lf the volume level of the built in speakers is too high noise may occur and the image quality may deteriorate In this case check the volume setting on both projectors e When two projectors are connected using the RS 232C cable the Main projector will be able to control the Sub projector This feature is known as Intellectual Stack M8 When Intellectual Stack by means of RS 232C feature is used RS 232C communication cannot be used to control the projector If you wish to control the projectors from a computer use the LAN connection that is connected to any of the projectors e When Intellectual Stack is used the operations or settings of some functions are restricted Refer to this manual for details LJ30 fog Installation For safety reasons read 1 1 Basic information and preparations M3 4 carefully before installation In addition take note of the followings for proper use of Instant Stack e When using Intellectual Stack both projectors will respond to the remote control signals until STACK MODE on either projector is set to SUB
302. the button of the projector displays a dialog To reset the filter time select the OK using the gt button FILTER TIME CANCEL gt OK e Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter for a suitable indication about the air filter e For the air filter cleaning see the section Cleaning and replacing the air filter 4115 e The filter time can be checked also with the Status Monitor on CP X8160 CP WX8255 CP WU8450 122 continued on next page 67 ltem scription This item is to assign one of the following functions to MY BUTTON 1 to 4 on the remote control G6 1 Use the A buttons on the MY BUTTON menu to select a button from MY BUTTON 1 to 4 and press the or ENTER button to display the MY BUTTON setup dialog 2 Then using the A W lt gt buttons sets one of the following functions to the chosen button Press the ENTER or INPUT button to save the setting SLIDESHOW Selects the input from USB TYPE A and starts a Slideshow MY IMAGE Displays the MY IMAGE menu 384 MESSENGER Turns the messenger text displayed on the screen on off L415 Messenger Function in the Network Guide When there is no transferred text data to display the message NO MESSENGER DATA appears SHADE Turns the lens shade closed and opened 1136 PbyP SWAP lt Only for CP WU8440 and CP WU8450 gt Swaps the picture on the right with one on the left when in the PobyP
303. the accessories specified by the manufacturer Read and keep the manuals of the accessories used e For special installation such as ceiling mounting be sure to consult your dealer beforehand Specific mounting accessories and services may be required e Do not put the projector on its side front or rear position e Do not attach nor place anything on the projector unless otherwise specified in the manual gt Do not install the projector near thermally conductive or flammable things gt Do not place the projector where any oils such as cooking or machine oil are used gt Do not place the projector in a place where it may get wet ACAUTION P Place the projector in a cool place with sufficient ventilation e Keep a space of 30 cm or more between a side of the projector and other objects such as walls e Do not stop up block nor cover the projector s vent holes e Do not place the projector at places that are exposed to magnetic fields doing so can cause the cooling fans inside the projector to malfunction gt Avoid placing the projector in smoky humid or dusty place e Do not place the projector near humidifiers NOTICE gt Position the projector to prevent light from directly hitting the projector s remote sensor gt Do not place the product in a place where radio interference may be caused gt Set the ALTITUDE of the SERVICE item in the OPTION menu correctly It is recommended to leave it at AUTO usually If the p
304. the sender e mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Configures the e mail address of up to five recipients You can also specify the TO or CC for each address The length of the recipient e mail address can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters Recipient E mail address Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE You can confirm whether the mail settings work correctly using the Send Test Mail button Please enable Send mail setting before clicking the Send Test Mail e If you connect the projector to an existing network consult a network administrator before setting server addresses 24 3 1 Projector Web Control continued 3 1 6 Alert Settings Displays and configures failure amp alert settings Item Description Cover Error The lamp cover has not been properly fixed Fan Error Lamp Error The cooling fan is not operating The lamp does not light and there is a possibility that interior portion has become heated Temp Error There is a possibility that the interior portion has become heated Air Flow Error Cold Error Filter Error The internal temperature is rising There is a possibility that the interior portion has become overcooled Filter time over Other Error Other error If displaying this error please contact your dealer Schedule Execution Error Schedule Execution error 127 Lamp Time Alar
305. tialize the adjustment of PERFECT FIT e When TRANSITION DETECTOR is ON these functions are not available 90 O AUTO When AUTO is pointed at pressing the or ENTER button performs automatic vertical keystone correction NOTE When the projector is in one of the following conditions the automatic vertical keystone correction feature may not work correctly or at all REAR CEILING or FRONT CEILING is selected for the INSTALLATION item in the SETUP menu and the projector screen is slanted or tilted down wards The ZOOM adjustment is not set to the full WIDE wide angle focus The projector is nearly horizontal about 4 The projector is inclined at about 35 degrees or over e When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center this function may not work well 32 Correcting the distortion continued O MANUAL When MANUAL is pointed at pressing the or KEYSTONE _ MANUAL ENTER button displays the KEYSTONE_MANUAL RETURN dialog 3 q _ Select the vertical or horizontal keystone CD B with the A V buttons 2 Use the lt gt buttons to adjust the keystone distortion NOTE When the zoom adjustment is set to the TELE telephoto focus this function may be excessive This function should be used when the zoom ad justment is set to the full WIDE wide angle focus whenever possible e When the horizontal lens shift is not set to the center this function may not work well
306. time ends Configures the month daylight savings time ends 1 12 Configures the week of the month daylight savings time ends First 2 3 4 Last Configures the day of the week daylight savings time ends Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat hour Configures the hour daylight savings time ends 0 23 minute Configures the minute daylight savings time ends 0 59 Daylight Savings Time Day Time continued on next page 30 3 1 Projector Web Control Date Time Settings continued Item Description Configures the time difference Set the same time difference Time difference as the one set on your computer If unsure consult your IT manager Click the ON check box to retrieve Date and Time information from the SNTP server and set the following items Configures the SNTP server address in IP format e The address allows not only IP address but also domain SNTP Server Address name if the valid DNS server is setup in the Network Settings The maximum length of host or domain name is up to 255 characters Configures the interval at which to retrieve Date and Time information from the SNTP server hour minute Cycle Click the Apply button to save the settings NOTE The new configuration settings are activated after restarting the network connection When the configuration settings are changed you must restart the network connection
307. tinued on next page Cleaning and replacing the air filter continued 1 0 Put the filter cover back into the place 1 1 Turn the projector on and reset the filter time using the FILTER TIME item in the EASY MENU 1 Press the MENU button to display a menu 2 Point at the FILTER TIME using the A V cursor buttons then press the gt cursor or the ENTER the RESET button A dialog will appear 3 Press the cursor button to select the OK on the dialog It performs resetting the filter time NOTE Please reset the filter time only when you have cleaned or replaced the air filter for a suitable indication about the air filter e The projector may display the message such as the CHECK THE AIR FLOW or turn off the projector to prevent the internal heat level rising 116 Other care Inside of the projector In order to ensure the safe use of your projector please have it cleaned and inspected by your dealer about once every year Caring for the lens If the lens is flawed soiled or fogged it could cause deterioration of display quality Please take care of the lens being cautious of handling 4 Turn the projector off and unplug the power cord Allow the projector to cool sufficiently 2 After making sure that the projector is cool adequately lightly wipe the lens with a commercially available lens cleaning wipe Do not touch the lens directly with your hand Caring for the cabinet and remo
308. tion the extra air filter is attached to inner side of the filter cover of CP X8160 CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 If one of the filters is damaged or heavily soiled replace whole filter set with a new one Request for a filter set with the following type number from your dealer when purchasing a new one Type number lt CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 gt MU06642 Type number lt CP X8160 CP WX8255 CP WU8450 gt UX38241 Turn the projector off and unplug the power 2 cord Allow the projector to sufficiently cool down Use a vacuum cleaner on and around the filter cover Pick and pull up the filter cover knobs to take it off Press up slightly the bottom side knobs to unlock the bottom side of the filter unit Pull the center knob to take the filter unit off Use a vacuum cleaner for the filter vent Filter cover of the projector and the outer side of the knobs mea filter unit es I on i rl i i fl cmt nt i ID AUO N O1 6 The filter unit consists of two parts Press lt Only for CP X8160 down around the interlocking parts to CP WX8240 and CP WU8450 gt unlock then separate the two parts 7 Use a vacuum cleaner for the inner side of each part of the filter unit to clean them up If the filters are damaged or heavily soiled replace them with the new ones 8 Combine the two parts to reassemble the filter unit Q Put the filter unit back into the projector knobs con
309. tionary Blinking Turned The projector is cooling down A certain error has been detected Please wait until POWER indicator finishes blinking and then perform the proper measure using the item descriptions below The lamp does not light and there is a possibility that interior portion has become heated Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 20 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the following items and then turn the power on again e Is there blockage of the air passage aperture e Is the air filter dirty e Does the peripheral temperature exceed 45 C e If you use CP X8150 CP WX8240 CP SX8350 or CP WU8440 does the peripheral temperature exceed 40 C If the same indication is displayed after the remedy please change the lamp referring to the section Replacing the lamp The lamp cover has not been properly fixed Please turn the power off and allow the projector to cool down at least 45 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp cover After performing any needed maintenance turn the power on again If the same indication is displayed after the remedy please contact your dealer or service company Regarding the indicator lamps continued POWER LAMP TEMP Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red Lighting I
310. to smoothly make your presentations and conduct conferences Wireless LAN To use Network Presentation an exclusive application LiveViewer is required It can be installed from the bundled application CD You can also download the latest version and relevant information from the Hitachi website http www hitachi america us digitalmedia or http www hitachidigitalmedia com For details of Network Presentation and instructions to install the LiveViewer refer to the manual for LiveViewer To start the Network Presentation select the LAN port as the input source on the projector and click the Starting Capture button on the LiveViewer LiveViewer function use depends on the model you are using If you want to use the latest downloaded LiveViewer please refer for the appropriate group item in the LiveViewer User s Manual This model will be in the Group of E NOTE When the screen resolution of your computer is over specified the computer image is shrunk in specified size as below before transferring to the projector CP X8150 CP X8160 1024 x 768 XGA The other models 1280 x 800 The transferred image is displayed as shrunk on the projected screen even if the panel resolution of the projector is larger than above 15 3 Web Control You can adjust or control the projector via a network from a web browser on a computer that is connected to the same network NOTE Internet Explorer 6 0 or later
311. to the Main window 1 Projector Information o ltem escrito _ _ _ O Projector Name Displays the projector name settings Location Displays the location name of the projector MAC Address Displays the wired LAN MAC address of the projector Displays the resolution and vertical frequency of the signal input selected on the projector Displays the usage time for the current lamp Assigned To Displays the user name for the projector 2 Projector Status o ltem oO Description _ _ _ _ _ _ Power Status Displays the current power status Input Source Displays the current input signal source Resolution Picture Mode Displays the current picture mode setting Installation Displays the current installation setting Eco Mode Displays the current eco mode setting Error Status Displays the current error status NOTE Projector Name Location and the user name for Assigned To may appear truncated if they are too long 47 3 2 Crestron e Control continued 3 2 4 Help Desk window Sends receives messages to from the administrator for Crestron RoomView Express Button Description ae Sends a message Check the received message 48 3 2 Crestron e Control continued 3 2 5 Emergency Alert When the administrator for Crestron RoomView Express sends out an alert message it will be displayed on the screen You can r
312. to the environment and manner the projector will be used in For the case of installation in a special state such as ceiling mount the specified mounting accessories EQSpecifications in the User s Manual concise and service may be required Before installing the projector consult your dealer about your installation Arrangement Refer to tables T 1 to T 6 at the back of User s Manual concise as well as the following to determine the screen size and projection distance The values shown in the table are calculated for a full size screen o Projector top Projector bottom B x V Screen size Projection distance from the front of the projector unit Screen height continued on next page Arrangement continued AWARNING P Install the projector where you can access the power outlet easily If an abnormality should occur unplug the projector urgently Otherwise it could cause a fire or electric shock gt Do not subject the projector to unstable conditions If the projector falls or topples over it could result in injury or damage to the projector and the surrounding things Using a damaged projector could result in a fire and an electric shock e Do not place the projector in unstable places such as an inclined surface places subject to vibration on top of a wobbly table or cart or a surface that is smaller than the projector e Do not put the projecto
313. tomatically disappeared e The magnification is automatically disabled when the displaying signal or its display condition is changed e While the magnification is active the keystone distortion condition may vary It will be restored when the magnification is disabled e Some horizontal stripes might be visible on the image while magnification is active e This function is not available in the following cases A sync signal in the range not supported is input There is no input signal 35 Temporarily freezing the screen 0g al e o 1 Press the FREEZE button on the remote control The FREEZE indication will appear on the screen however the indication will not appear when the OFF is selected for the MESSAGE item in the SCREEN menu E461 and the projector will go into the FREEZE mode which the picture is frozen To exit the FREEZE mode and restore the screen to normal press the FREEZE button again gilo cm A 220 BOG de O2e no Ape PeDOOe FREEZE button NOTE The projector automatically exits from the FREEZE mode when some control buttons are pressed e If the projector continues projecting a still image for a long time the LCD panel might possibly be burned in Do not leave the projector in the FREEZE mode for too long e Images might appear degraded when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction Temporarily shading the screen 4 Press the SHADE
314. tomatically start to operate However if the RS 232C cable is disconnected or AC power is not supplied the other projector will not turn on e In cases when PIN LOCK or TRANSITION DETECTOR on both projectors is set to ON GOperating Guide SECURITY menu the two projectors will not turn on even if ALTERNATE is selected Enter the security code on both projectors and one of the projectors will turn on e When Intellectual Stack is in use the POWER indicator on the projector operates differently from normal EQOperating Guide Troubleshooting When both the Main and Sub projectors are in standby mode the Main projector determines which projector to turn on according to the STACK MODE setting if the ON button on the remote control or STANDBY ON button of the Main projector is pressed The POWER indicator on the Main projector blinks in green while the Main projector determines which projector to turn on If the Main projector is turned on the POWER indicator on the Main projector turns to steady green after lighting up as per normal If the Sub projector is turned on the POWER indicator on the Main projector lights in orange after the Sub projector is turned on If an error occurs on the Main projector the Sub projector turns on and the POWER indicator on the Main projector lights or blinks in red 16 STACK menu settings 3 4 Selecting lamp switching mode The following setting is necessary only when ALTERNATE
315. ton executes the auto keystone function AUTO KEYSTONE coe the AUTO KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu E54 Using the lt gt buttons corrects the vertical keystone distortion CY KEYSTONE Sge the 9 KEYSTONE item in SETUP menu L154 Using the lt gt buttons corrects the horizontal keystone distortion KEYSTONE See the KEYSTONE in SETUP menu E55 Pressing the button displays the PERFECT FIT dialog PERFECT FIT See the PERFECT FIT item in SETUP menu 0455 Using the lt gt buttons switches the picture mode The picture modes are combinations of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP settings Choose a suitable mode according to the projected source PICTURE MODE NORMAL CINEMA amp DYNAMIC BOARD BLACK j 2 DICOM SIM amp DAYTIME WHITEBOARD amp BOARD GREEN continued on next page continued on next page 42 ptem escription GAMMA COLOR TEMP NORMAL 1 DEFAULT 2 MID e When the combination of GAMMA and COLOR TEMP differs from pre assigned modes above the display on the menu for the PICTURE MODE is CUSTOM Please refer to the GAMMA and COLOR TEMP L144 45 items in PICTURE menu e Lines or other noise might appear on the screen when this function is operated but it is not a malfunction e DICOM SIM is the projector s DICOM Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine simulation mode This mode simulates the DICOM standard which is a standard applicable to digital communications in med
316. tor LA26 25 Setting input ports using menu 5 3 Starting up Main projector After performing section 5 2 Checking Main projector s operating status the two projectors are confirmed to have been set to ALTERNATE mode and the Sub projector is currently operating As the settings for Intellectual Stack can be changed only when the Main projector is operating this section explains how to switch from the Sub projector to the Main projector 1 Use the A lt gt buttons to go into the following menu ADVANCED MENU gt OPTION SERVICE _ COMMUNICATION _ STACK gt SERVICE gt COMMUNICATION gt STACK iam DUAL AL TERNATE WODE NORMAL l STACK menu will appear on screen ei ina Operating Guide OPTION menu 2 Check the ALTERNATE MODE setting in the menu If NORMAL is displayed the two projectors are turned on alternately Therefore the Main projector will be turned on if you restart the projectors 1 Press the STANDBY button on the remote control or STANDBY ON button of the Main projector The Sub projector will turn off 2 After the projector has cooled down press the ON or STANDBY ON button to turn on again The Main projector will be turned on lf AUTO is displayed the projector with the least lamp usage is turned on Therefore the Main projector may not be turned on even if you restart the projectors Follow the procedures below to turn on the Main projector 1 Use the A F button to highlight STACK MODE a
317. tor when using the remote control The two images are not superimposed me The images are correctly either out of Adjust to superimpose the images with the focus or not well 7OOM FOCUS and LENS SHIFT features superimposed If necessary adjust PERFECT FIT and KEYSTONE as well There are some adjustment differences in the two images Try to resolve the problem with the following The images measures from the two Press the AUTO button on the remote 31 49 projectors do not control or execute AUTO ADJUST in Operating superimposed EXECUTE on each of the projectors Guide even after Adjust H POSITION and V POSITION on 48 performing fine each of the projectors in Operating adjustment Check the RESOLUTION setting in the Guide INPUT menu and change to the same 053 setting if the setting differs between Main in Operating and Sub Guide 33 Projector CP X8150 CP X8160 CP WX8240 CP WX8255 CP SX8350 CP WU8440 CP WU8450 User s Manual detailed Operating Guide Technical gt lan OKs OF CAMINA SEINEN Resolution H x V H frequency kHz V frequency Hz Rating Signal mode 720 x 400 37 9 85 0 VESA a 832x624 497 745 Mac 16 mode 1024x768 484 60 0 VESA XGA 60Hz 1024x768 6o0 750 VESA XGA 75Hz 1280x768 477 60 0 VESA W XGA 60Hz 1280x800 497 600 VESA 1280x800 60Hz 1280x960 600 600 VESA 1280 x 960 60Hz 1280x1024 640 60 0 VESA SXGA 60HZ
318. triction as below e When SAVING is selected the RS 232C communication control except to turn the projector on and the network function are disabled while the projector is in the standby mode If the COMMUNICATION TYPE in the COMMUNICATION menu is set to NETWORK BRIDGE all of the RS 232C commands are disabled 72 STANDBY MODE When SAVING is selected AUDIO OUT STANDBY setting of AUDIO SOURCE 57 is invalid and no signal is output from AUDIO OUT port in the standby mode e When SAVING is selected STANDBY setting of MONITOR OUT is invalid and no signal is output from MONITOR OUT port in the standby mode e When SAVING is selected the CENTERING feature while the projector is in the standby mode is disabled e lt Only for CP X8160 CP WX8255 and CP WU8450 gt When SAVING is selected the Status Monitor and its button operation are unavailable while the projector is in the standby mode While the image signal from the input port chosen in step 1 is projected the image signal from the input port selected in step 2 is output to a an m MONITOR OUT port aan SO O a i 1 Choose a picture input port using vanes a A V buttons i 5s Choose STANDBY to select the m e o picture output in the standby mode MONITOR OUT 2 Select one of the COMPUTERIN CE Wy e040 CP WX8255 ports using lt gt buttons CP SX8350 gt Select OFF to disable the MONITOR e OUT port for the input port or standby oa CONTR ay mode chosen in
319. ts USING MENU ccceeeeeeeees 25 5 1 Preparing for menu operations 25 5 2 Checking Main projector s operating StatuS cceeeeeeee es 25 5 3 Starting up Main projector 26 5 4 Setting the menu 06 27 Inputting image from Main to Sub Computer signal c ccseeeees 27 Inputting image from Main to Sub Video signal either component or video 28 Inputting image to Sub and Main individually 28 6 Restrictions on Schedule function 30 7 Troubleshooting 32 Ta introduction 1 1 Basic information and preparations Instant Stack Instant Stack is a feature that allows you to superimpose images projected from two projectors easily Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack Instant Stack includes the following two features When two projectors are connected via an RS 232C cable with necessary set tings performed on the projectors these two projectors will automatically operate In synchronization with each other according to the settings This is known as Intellectual Stack in this manual The two projectors operate individually without the RS 232C connection This is known as Simple Stack in this manual Remote control for Intellectual Stack and Simple Stack For Intellectual Stack one projector is set as Main and the other is set as Sub Only the Main projector is capable of receiving the remote control signals
320. ttons have been operated the Status Monitor displays as below depending on the condition of the projector NOTE The Status Monitor displays nothing while the projector is in standby mode if the STANDBY MODE item of SETUP menu is set to SAVING E156 e When INSTALLATION in the SETUP menu is set to FRONT CEILING or REAR CEILING the contents on the Status Monitor are displayed upside down 455 O In a normal state The Status Monitor displays the state of the projector in three lines STANDBY stline Displays the condition of the projector SE ROUSE While the lamp is on the selected port is awe displayed Displayed conditions are as below example STANDBY The projector is in standby mode WARM UP The projector is warming up SEARCHING The projector is searching an input signal COOL DOWN The projector is cooling down Displays the condition of the detected input signal while the lamp 2nd line is on Otherwise displays the serial number of the projector Displayed conditions are as below SYNC OUT Detected input signal is out of specified range NO SIGNAL There is no input signal CONNECTED The projector has connected to the network or the computer and some image is transferred to the projector while the LAN or USB TYPE B port is selected HOLD The projector has connected to the network but no image is transferred while the LAN port is selected NOT CONNECTED The projector
321. ual After you have cleaned or changed the air filter please be sure to reset the filter timer L467 115 The button operation is not available Check the button you are going to use M6 Even when a usable button is pressed all button operations are not available under the following conditions While the lens is moving button operation from the control panel or the remote control might be ignored Pressing the one of buttons to call a signal input might be ignored when all the input ports belonging to the category the button s name shows are set to the SKIP by the item SOURCE SKIP of the OPTION menu 119 Regarding the indicator lamps When operation of the LAMP TEMP and POWER indicators differs from usual check and cope with it according to the following table POWER indicator Lighting In Orange indicator indicator Description Turned The projector is in a standby state Please refer to the section Power on off Blinking Turned Turned The projector is warming up In Green off off Please wait Lighting Turned Turned The projector is in an on state In Green off off Ordinary operations may be performed Blinking Turned Turned The projector is cooling down In Orange off off Please wait Blinking In Red Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red Blinking In Red or Lighting In Red continued on next page 120 discre tionary Lighting In Red discre
322. ued nekboawedsediesamdianilduencne 54 GAM HALF DUPLEX syrienne ao eoa iE Ea a T 54 Ae ODUPE saroe cacti E E EE E E E esnmane 55 7 Other Functions assassassnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 56 7 1 E Mail AlenS rdan eee NA nAAL yechee 56 7 2 Projector Management using SNMP ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeeenees 58 1 3 Event Scheduling Scvoeseeeceaawasestvesedeentee ssazccvaeted nave vensneteatewnsalecssmmmcevenme ta 59 7 4 Command Control via the Network ccceccceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesaeeeeesaees 62 7 5 Crestron ROOMVICW c cccceseceseceveseecteceseserscveeeenssetesecessceseeesceseceeeseeseeesees 67 8 Troubleshooting cceeeceeeeeeeeeneseneeeeseeeseeeseneeeneeneseneseneseees 68 9 Specifications 00 0 ccc ceecceeeeeeeeeneeeneeeneeaeseeesenesaneenesonssenesenennees 69 10 Warranty and after sales service ccccceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeens 70 To use the wireless network function of this projector the designated USB wire less adapter that is sold as an option is required For precautions according to the standards and laws refer to the documents that come with the adapter Restriction on plugging and unplugging the USB wireless adapter Before you insert or pull out the USB wireless adapter from the projector turn off the power of the projector and pull out the power cord s plug from the outlet Do not touch the USB wireless adapter that is connected to the proj
323. umbnail screen is displayed Button operation Remote Web Remote Functions control Control panel Control AlV lt gt AlV lt gt A lt 4 gt Moves cursor PAGE UP i PAGE UP PAGE DOWN PAGE DOWN Switches pages e Displays the selected image on the Full Screen mode when a cursor is on a Thumbnail image ENTER e Displays the SETUP menu below for the selected image when a cursor is on a Thumbnail image number The SETUP menu for the selected image Use the lt gt cursor buttons to switch each setting or use the gt cursor button to execute the functions as follows RETURN eee gt cursor button or ENTER to return to the Thumbnail Switch to ON to set the selected image as the first image in the Slideshow This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file 103 Switch to ON to set the selected image as the last image in the Slideshow This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file 103 Switch to ON to skip the selected image in the Slideshow This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file 221103 Press the gt cursor or ENTER button to rotate the selected still ROTATE image 90 degrees clockwise This setting information will be saved in the playlist txt file 103 96 PC LESS Presentation continued Operating by the Thumbnail menu You can also control the images by using t
324. unction in the device or projector e The function of some input ports can be selected according to your usage requirements Check the reference page indicated beside each port in the following illustration e Be careful not to mistakenly connect a connector to a wrong port Otherwise it may cause malfunction in the device or projector When connecting a connector to a port make sure that the shape of the connector fits the port Tighten the screws to connect a connector equipped with screws to a port Use the cables with straight plugs not L shaped ones as the input ports of the projector are recessed About Plug and Play capability e Plug and Play is a system composed of a computer its operating system and peripheral equipment i e display devices This projector is VESA DDC 2B compatible Plug and Play can be used by connecting this projector to a computer that is VESA DDC display data channel compatible Take advantage of this feature by connecting a computer cable to the COMPUTER IN1 port DDC 2B compatible Plug and Play may not work properly if any other type of connection is attempted Please use the standard drivers in your computer as this projector is a Plug and Play monitor continued on next page 10 Connecting with your devices continued 126 157 L26 Computer GEN Ean mn tet 28 ne e p USB USBTYPEA f DC5V Es Ooo 0 en gt TUN i
325. urning on the projector In DUAL mode both projectors will turn on Enter the security code for the projector that is locked by the security function In ALTERNATE mode if the projector locked by the security function is due to turn on according to the ALTERNATE mode setting only that projector will turn on Otherwise both projectors will turn on Enter the security code for the projector that is locked by the security function After the security lock is released one of the projectors will turn off if both projectors are turned on 22 4 Connecting cables To superimpose two images onto one screen the same image must be input to the Main and Sub projectors There are various methods to input the image to the projectors This chapter describes the ways of connecting the cables Read this chapter to find a method that meets your needs NOTE If Simple Stack without an RS 232C connection is used the Main and Sub projectors described below do not exist Main in this chapter is read as one projector and Sub as the other projector e For details on the specifications of the input ports refer to Connecting with your devices MoOperating Guide Setting up and Connection to the ports Operating Guide Technical 4 1 Connecting an RS 232C cable If you are using Intellectual Stack connect an RS 232C cross cable between the CONTROL ports on the Main and Sub projectors M8 This connection is not required if you are using S
326. xed Please turn the power off and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet and allow the projector to cool down at least 45 minutes After the projector has sufficiently cooled down please make confirmation of the attachment state of the lamp and lamp cover and then turn the power on again The signal cables are not correctly connected Correctly connect the connection cables Signal source does not correctly work Correctly set up the signal source device by referring to the manual of the source device The input changeover settings are mismatched 26 Select the input signal and correct the settings AV MUTE function is working 25 Neither sounds Press AV MUTE button on the remote control nor pictures are The USB TYPE B port is selected as the picture input outputted source even if MOUSE is selected for USB TYPE B Select USB DISPLAY for USB TYPE B in OPTION menu to project the picture input to the port Otherwise select other port for picture input The USB TYPE B port is not recognized as an input port because of electrical noise Temporarily set to MOUSE with the USB TYPE B on the OPTION menu and then return it to USB DISPLAY to enable the USB TYPE B port to be recognized as an input port continued on next page 123 Phenomena that may be easy to be mistaken for machine defects continued Reference Phenomenon Cases not involving a machine defect The projector does not recognize the USB st
327. y the menu on Set A 2 Use the A W lt gt buttons to open the TEMPLATE dialog then select STACK on the dialog EQ Operating Guide SCREEN menu 3 Press the MENU button on the control panel of Set B to display the menu STACK of TEMPLATE 4 Use the A lt gt buttons to select PERFECT SCP XB160 CP XB160 __ FIT from EASY MENU or the SETUP menu of i i ADVANCED MENU fXOperating Guide EASY MENU or SETUP menu PERFECT FIT dialog appears on screen Select the test pattern icon Mi shown in the lower left of the dialog with the lt buttons When you press the ENTER or INPUT button the test pattern lt CP SX8350 CP WU8440 appears or disappears CP WU8450 gt 5 Using PERFECT FIT on Set B adjust the image size and position of Set B to superimpose well to the image of Set A Itis recommended to adjust in the following ways 1 Roughly adjust the four corners in the order below ga iR Top left Top right Bottom right Bottom left j PERFECT FIT dialog 2 Fine adjust the four corners in the same way Eee a NOTES for all users For details on PERFECT FIT refer to PERFECT FIT of EASY MENU or SETUP menu in the Operating Guide e It is strongly recommended to use a flat screen If a curved or skewed screen is used it is very difficult to align the two images even if you use the pin barrel adjustment of PERFECT FIT e Even through fine adjustment of the images from the two projectors
328. you to capture an image for use as a MyScreen image which can be used as the BLANK screen and START UP screen Display the image you want to capture before executing the following procedure 1 Selecting this item displays a dialog Gam titled MyScreen It will ask you if EE you start capturing an image from the current screen Please wait for the target image to be displayed and press the ENTER or INPUT button when the image is displayed The image will freeze and the frame for capturing will appear To stop performing press the RESET button on the remote control 2 Using the A W lt gt buttons adjusts the frame position Please move the frame to the position of the image which you want to use The frame may not be able to be MyScreen moved for some input signals To start registration press the ENTER or INPUT button on the remote control To restore the screen and return to the previous dialog press the RESET button on the remote control Registration may take several minutes When the registration is completed the registered screen and the following message is displayed for several seconds MyScreen registration is finished If the registration failed the following message is displayed A capturing error has occurred Please try again e This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen Lock item 461 e This function cannot be selected when the ON is selected to the MyScreen PASSWORD item

English

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents